+ All Categories
Home > Documents > EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO...

EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO...

Date post: 25-Sep-2018
Category:
Upload: trannguyet
View: 218 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
78
EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO Hojas de Aplicaciones para los módulos domóticos de Siemens de las Prácticas 5 y 6 Producto Número Pedido Programa Aplicación Base de Datos ETS2 Shutter Switch UP520 5WG1 520-2AB01 20 A1 Actuator–BCU Shutter 902502 UP520_01.vd1 Dimmer UP525 5WG1 525-2AB01 20 A1 Actuator–BCU Dimming 903502 UP525_01.vd1 Binary Output UP562 5WG1 562-2AB01 20 A1 Actuator–BCU Binary 901502 UP562_01.vd1 Salida binaria N562 5WG1 562-1AB01 11 A2 Binar 520401 siemens.vd1 Pulsador doble UP211 5WG1 211-2AB11 10 S2 Apa/Enc 220202 11 S2 Regulad 220303 siemens.vd1 Dimmer N527 5WG1 527-1AB01 11 A1 Dimmer 610201 N527.vd1 Sensor de movimiento UP250 5WG1 250-2AP11 11 S1 DetectMo 210A02 up250.vd1 Decodificador IR N450/02 5WG1 450-1AB02 12 CO IR Decod 7F0301 N450_02.vd1 Sensor Luminosidad y Temperatura AP254 5WG1 254-3EY01 12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01 ap254.vd1 Módulo de Escenas N300 5WG1 300-1AB01 12 CO 740601 siemens.vd1 Temporizador Horario REG371 5WG1 371-5EY01 11 S2 Switching,Value,Scene 221D01 reg371ey.vd1 Interfaz Telefónico “TC 700900041 TC Rutenbck.vdx Módulo de Tiempos N302 5WG1 302-1AB01 12COTime740202 N302.vd1 Simulador de Presencia N345 5WG1 345-1AB01 0107 Presencesimulation 800D05 N345.vd1 Controlador de Eventos- Planificador-Lógico N350 5WG1 350-1AB01 0107Event-Schedule-Logic 801701 N350.vd1
Transcript
Page 1: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

Hojas de Aplicaciones para los módulos domóticos de Siemens de las Prácticas 5 y 6

Producto Número Pedido Programa Aplicación Base de Datos ETS2

Shutter Switch UP520 5WG1 520-2AB01 20 A1 Actuator–BCU Shutter 902502 UP520_01.vd1

Dimmer UP525 5WG1 525-2AB01 20 A1 Actuator–BCU Dimming 903502 UP525_01.vd1

Binary Output UP562 5WG1 562-2AB01 20 A1 Actuator–BCU Binary 901502 UP562_01.vd1 Salida binaria N562 5WG1 562-1AB01 11 A2 Binar 520401 siemens.vd1

Pulsador doble UP211 5WG1 211-2AB11 10 S2 Apa/Enc 220202 11 S2 Regulad 220303 siemens.vd1

Dimmer N527 5WG1 527-1AB01 11 A1 Dimmer 610201 N527.vd1

Sensor de movimiento UP250 5WG1 250-2AP11 11 S1 DetectMo 210A02 up250.vd1

Decodificador IR N450/02 5WG1 450-1AB02 12 CO IR Decod 7F0301 N450_02.vd1

Sensor Luminosidad y Temperatura AP254 5WG1 254-3EY01 12 S2 Brightness and Temperature

221C01 ap254.vd1

Módulo de Escenas N300 5WG1 300-1AB01 12 CO 740601 siemens.vd1

Temporizador Horario REG371 5WG1 371-5EY01 11 S2 Switching,Value,Scene 221D01 reg371ey.vd1

Interfaz Telefónico “TC 700900041 TC Rutenbck.vdx

Módulo de Tiempos N302 5WG1 302-1AB01 12COTime740202 N302.vd1

Simulador de Presencia N345 5WG1 345-1AB01 0107 Presencesimulation 800D05 N345.vd1

Controlador de Eventos-Planificador-Lógico N350 5WG1 350-1AB01 0107Event-Schedule-Logic 801701 N350.vd1

Page 2: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/1

Use of the application program Product family: Input/output Product type: Binary/binary Manufacturer: Siemens Name: Shutter switch UP 520/01 Order no.: 5WG1 520-2AB01 Functional description With the application program “20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502”, the output of the shutter switch can be used to control a shutter, roller blind or skylight. The following functions can be assigned to the 2-fold push button DELTA profil: switching (on/off/toggle/value), dimming (on/off or brighter/darker), controlling shutters, skylights and security gates etc., recalling/programming scenes and status display via LEDs. Functions of the rockers Switching A separate communication object is available for each rocker contact of the two rockers. It is therefore possible to switch up to four different groups of luminaires. It is possible to set via parameters which switch function (on/off/toggle) is carried out when the rocker is pressed or released. An 8 bit value can also be assigned to each rocker contact. The corresponding value is sent immediately once the rocker has been pressed. It is therefore possible for a dimming actuator for example to be set to a defined value. A “bell function” is also possible. The On/Off signal is sent when the rocker is pressed and the inverse signal is sent when the rocker is released. Dimming A distinction is made between a short and long push button action. A short push button action sends a corresponding switching command (on or off). If the push button is pressed and held down for a longer period (the duration of which can be set), a dimming command is sent. The functions of “Dimming with stop telegram” and “Dimming with cyclical sending” are available. If “Dimming with stop telegram” is selected, a long push button action sends a command to the dimming object to dim by 100%. When the rocker is released, a stop command is sent. If “Dimming with cyclical sending” is selected, a dimming command is sent at set intervals for the duration of the push button action. It is also possible to assign parameters to the adjustment of the brightness value per dimming command (e.g. adjust by 1/8).

Shutter control A distinction is made between a short and long push button action. If the rocker is pressed briefly, a switching telegram is sent which adjusts the louvres or stops any shutter movement. After a long push button action, the shutters are either raised or lowered. When assigning parameters, it is possible to choose between “Upper contact: Up, Lower contact: Down” or vice versa. Skylights and security gates for example can be controlled in both directions using this parameter. In this case the Up command corresponds to the Off command and the Down command corresponds to the On command. Scene Using the “Scene” function, users are able to reprogram a scene module themselves without changing the project design in ETS i.e. they can assign other brightness values or switching states to the individual groups of the respective scene. Two scenes can be recalled by pressing the rocker briefly (e.g. upper contact: scene 1, lower contact: scene 2) while a long rocker operation is used to program them. The scene is recalled via a 1 bit switching command, whereby scene 1 is recalled with a “0” telegram and scene 2 is recalled with a “1” telegram. It is possible to specify in the parameters which telegrams are sent by the upper and lower rocker contacts. The scene is saved via a 1 bit switching command, whereby scene 1 is saved with a “0” telegram and scene 2 is saved with a “1” telegram. An application with this type of function must also be used in the scene module. The application programs “12 C0 Scene 740701” and “12 C0 Scene 740801” are available. Before programming a scene, the actuators concerned must be set to the required brightness values or switching states using the sensors provided. The scene modules that have been addressed are requested on receipt of a telegram to scan the current brightness values and switching states of the actuators and to store them in the corresponding scene. A long rocker operation is indicated by the LED lighting up. It is possible to specify the period that distinguishes a short and long push button action. LED The push button has three LEDs. There are two communication objects available for the two upper LEDs. They can be used either to display the switching states or as an orientation light if the corresponding parameters have been selected. The third LED serves as an orientation light.

Page 3: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/2

Functions of the shutter output Shutter (Roller blind), Up/Down When the “Up/Down” object receives a telegram, the shutter (roller blind) is moved in the required direction for a set period. The shutter is raised if the object value is “0” and lowered if the object value is “1”. The shutter or roller blind can also be controlled via a dimming object. In this setting, the shutter (roller blind) and louvre objects are inverted to achieve a synchronisation with the push buttons that are being used. The relays are automatically opened once the set period for shutter or roller blind movement has elapsed. If the shutter (blind) is already travelling in a certain direction and “Up/Down” telegrams are received to move the shutter in the opposite direction, the shutter (blind) first stops for a set interval before it changes direction. This “Pause on change in direction” depends on the shutter motor that is being used and information should be obtained from the manufacturer. When the shutter is lowered, it is completely closed. For this reason, it is possible to set a period (“Delay time on a direction change”) which causes the shutter motor to move in another direction and thus leads to louvre adjustment. This is also the case if the lowering of the shutter is interrupted by a stop telegram. The time set for the “Pause on change in direction” is observed. Louvres, Open/Closed The behaviour of the shutter on receipt of a telegram for louvre adjustment depends on the current status of the shutter. If the shutter is travelling in a specific direction, the shutter movement is stopped. In the case of a roller blind, the receipt of a louvre adjustment telegram functions like a stop telegram. If the roller blind is stationary, it has no effect. During louvre adjustment, if another telegram is received to rotate the louvres in the same direction, the adjustment period is extended. If however a telegram is received to rotate the louvres in the opposite direction, the command is carried out once the pause on change in direction has been observed. If the shutter is stationary, a louvre adjustment telegram leads to shutter movement in the required direction. Once the set period for movement has elapsed (normally 150 ms to 200 ms), the shutter motor is automatically switched off. If a shutter is lowered (without reverse step), the louvres remain closed in this direction. If the shutter is stopped and then raised step by step (louvre adjustment), the louvres are opened first of all and then rotated upwards again. If the louvres are completely closed, further telegrams to rotate the louvres in the same direction cause the shutters to be moved step by step in this direction.

Safety object (wind alarm) The safety function can be enabled or disabled. In the event of an alarm signal, a “1” is received by the safety object and the shutters are raised. The safety position of the roller blinds can be selected. The safety object expects to receive cyclical telegrams from the signalling device (e.g. wind sensor) for monitoring purposes. Even if there is no alarm, the sensor must send telegrams with the value “0” (no alarm) at a set time interval (monitoring time). If the telegrams fail to appear, the shutters are also moved to the safety position. The object value of the safety object is thus set internally to “1” (alarm). The current alarm status can be read out via the safety object (if the safety function is enabled). If the safety position has been activated, the shutters/roller blinds can no longer be controlled via “Up/Down” or louvre adjustment telegrams. If the shutter or roller blind is moved to the safety position, thereby changing direction, the time set in the parameter “Pause on change in direction” is observed. The relays are not opened once the period for shutter or roller blind movement has elapsed. This guarantees that the shutter/roller blind reaches the safety position. The shutter/roller blind can only be operated once the safety object receives a telegram with the value “0” (no alarm). Bus voltage failure and recovery The shutter or roller blind is switched off on bus voltage recovery. The shutter and roller blind can be moved up, moved down or stopped on bus voltage failure. In the event of a bus voltage failure, the pause on change in direction that is normally observed is not taken into account. This means for example that if a shutter is currently being lowered, it will change direction after approx. 20 ms. Shutter motors that require a pause are not able to carry out this change in direction. If the relay contacts were already opened before the bus voltage failure, the functionality is not taken into account. When operating heavy roller blind motors, the setting “STOP” should be selected in order to protect the relay contacts. Automatic opening of the relays It is possible to prevent the relays from opening automatically (via the parameter “Function of louvres“ in the “Shutter” parameter window). This deactivation takes effect if the relay has been closed for example by an “Open/Closed” telegram. Once a motor has been set in motion, it can then only be brought to a halt with a stop telegram (necessary for reverse circuits). For this reason, the louvre adjustment telegram is always interpreted as a stop telegram. This is also the case when the shutter is stationary (louvre adjustment telegrams no longer exist).

Page 4: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/3

V WARNING When using the shutter switch UP 520/01 for roller blind drive mechanisms, the following should be noted when assigning parameters: (It can otherwise lead to welding of the contacts). • The parameter “Pause on change in direction” must be

set to the time given by the manufacturer of the roller blind (generally longer than 500 ms).

• The parameter “Behaviour on bus voltage failure” should be set to “STOP”.

Assigning parameters to the rockers Switch Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Switch, Rocker

A (upper rocker contact)

On 1 Bit CT

1 Switch, Rocker A (lower rocker contact)

Off 1 Bit CT

The switching telegrams for rocker A are sent via the group addresses in these objects. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If the setting “Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. 2 Switch, Rocker

B (upper rocker contact)

On 1 Bit CT

3 Switch, Rocker B (lower rocker contact)

Off 1 Bit CT

The switching telegrams for rocker B are sent via the group addresses in these objects. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If the setting “Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper contact Off

On Toggle 8-bit Value press: On, release: Off press: Off, release: On

Lower contact Off On Toggle 8-bit Value press: On, release: Off press: Off, release: On

This parameter determines which switching state is sent via the corresponding switching object when the upper and lower rocker contacts are pressed. “On” or “Off”: An On or Off telegram is sent when the contact is pressed. There is no evaluation when the rocker is released. “Toggle”: When the rocker is pressed, the value in the switching object is inverted. There is no evaluation when the rocker is released. “8-bit Value”: An adjustable 8 bit value is sent when the rocker is operated. When this setting is selected, the parameter window changes and an additional parameter is displayed for defining the value. “press: On, release: Off”: An On telegram is generated when the contact is pressed while releasing the contact produces an Off telegram. “press: Off, release: On”: An Off telegram is generated when the contact is pressed while releasing the contact produces an On telegram.

Page 5: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/4

Dimming with stop telegram Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Dimming On /

Off, Rocker A On / Off 1 Bit

CT

The switching telegrams for rocker A are sent via the group addresses in these objects. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If the setting “Toggle / Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. 1 Dimming,

Rocker A Brighter / Darker 4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker A and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. 2 Dimming On /

Off, Rocker B On / Off 1 Bit

CT

The switching telegrams for rocker B are sent via the group addresses in these objects. 3 Dimming,

Rocker B Brighter / Darker 4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker B and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact On / Off

Toggle / Toggle This parameter defines which switching value is sent via the object after a brief operation of the upper and lower contact. “On / Off”: Pressing the upper contact sends an On telegram while an Off telegram is sent when the lower contact is pressed. “Toggle / Toggle”: The value in the switching object is inverted when one of the contacts is pressed. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If a rocker is pressed for longer than the set time, the push button detects a long rocker operation and sends dimming telegrams.

Page 6: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/5

Dimming with cyclical sending Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Dimming On / Off /

Toggle, Rocker A On / Off / Toggle

1 Bit CWT

The switching telegrams for rocker A are sent via the group addresses in these objects. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If the setting “Toggle / Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. 1 Dimming,

Rocker A Brighter / Darker

4 Bit CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker A and sends a telegram after a long push button action. It is possible to set via parameters which dimming telegrams are generated when the upper or lower contact is pressed. 2 Dimming On / Off /

Toggle, Rocker B On / Off / Toggle

1 Bit CWT

The switching telegrams for rocker B are sent via the group addresses in these objects. 3 Dimming,

Rocker B Brighter / Darker

4 Bit CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker B and sends a telegram after a long push button action.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical.

Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact On / Off, Step = 1/1

On / Off, Step = 1/2 On / Off, Step = 1/4 On / Off, Step = 1/8 On / Off, Step = 1/16 On / Off, Step = 1/32 On / Off, Step = 1/64 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/1 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/4 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/8 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/16 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/32 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/64

This parameter determines which switching value is sent when the upper and lower contacts are pressed briefly. The change in the brightness value that is carried out by a dimming telegram when a long push button action is detected is also set here. For example, in the setting “Step = 1/8”, 8 dimming telegrams have to be sent in order to dim from 0% to 100%. “On / Off, Step = x”: A short operation of the upper contact generates an On telegram while an Off telegram is sent after the lower contact is pressed briefly. “Dim brighter” telegrams are sent if the upper contact is pressed for a long period while “Dim darker” telegrams are sent if the lower contact is pressed. “Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = x”: The value in the switching object is inverted after a short push button action. The dimming function remains the same as for the setting “On / Off, Step = x”. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If a rocker is pressed for longer than the set time, the push button detects a long rocker operation and sends dimming telegrams. Interval for cyclical sending 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

The repetition rate for cyclical sending after a long push button action is set here. The bus load should be taken into consideration when setting this interval.

Page 7: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/6

Shutter Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Louvres,

Rocker A Open / Closed 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command for louvre adjustment after a brief operation of rocker A. It is possible to set via parameters which switching command is generated when the rocker is pressed. 1 Shutter,

Rocker A Up / Down 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command to raise or lower the shutter after a long operation of rocker A. It is possible to set via parameters which switching command is generated when the upper or lower contact is pressed. 2 Louvres,

Rocker B Open / Closed 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command for louvre adjustment after a brief operation of rocker B. 3 Shutter,

Rocker B Up / Down 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command to raise or lower the shutter after a long operation of rocker B.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact Up / Down

Down / Up This parameter defines the switching command for the upper and lower rocker contacts. In the default setting, a brief operation of the upper contact causes the louvres to be opened by a step with an Off telegram. Pressing the lower contact closes the louvres by a step with an On telegram. A long operation of the upper contact raises the shutter with an Off telegram while pressing the lower contact lowers the shutter with an On telegram. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If a rocker is pressed for longer than the set time, the push button detects a long rocker operation.

Page 8: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/7

Scene Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Scene,

Rocker A Recall 1 Bit CT

The telegrams for recalling scenes are sent via the group address in this object. On receipt of this telegram, the scene module sends the stored brightness values of the scene via the group objects to the switch/dim actuators that have been addressed. 1 Scene,

Rocker A Save 1 Bit CT

The programming telegrams are sent via the group address in this object to the corresponding scene module. 2 Scene,

Rocker B Recall 1 Bit CT

The telegrams for recalling scenes are sent via the group address in this object. 3 Scene,

Rocker B Save 1 Bit CT

The programming telegrams are sent via the group address in this object to the corresponding scene module.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical.

Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact 0 / 1

1 / 0 This parameter defines the sending signal when the rocker contacts are pressed. “0 / 1”: When the upper contact is pressed briefly, scene 1 is set with a “0” telegram by the scene modules that have been addressed. In the same way, scene 2 is set when the lower contact is pressed briefly. After a long push button action, these scene modules are requested on receipt of a telegram to scan the current brightness values and switching states of the actuators and to store them in the corresponding scene. “1 / 0”: The assignment of scenes to the rocker contacts is inverted in this setting. Start to save scene at 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter indicates the length of time that the rocker must be operated in order to distinguish between recalling the scene and switching to programming mode. Shorter push button action than the set time: The scene is recalled. Longer push button action than the set time: The scene is switched to programming mode.

Page 9: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/8

LED Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 8 LED left Status 1 Bit CRW

9 LED right Status 1 Bit CRW

The switching telegrams are received via the group addresses in these objects when the left and right LEDs are used to display the switching state. If “On” or “Off” is selected, these objects are not displayed and have no function.

Parameters

Parameters Settings Orientation light (LED) Off

On Using this parameter, the third LED can be switched off or used as an orientation light. Function of right LED Off

On Status (via separate object) Inverted (via separate object)

Function of right LED Off On Status (via separate object) Inverted (via separate object)

The LEDs can be parameterised as an orientation light or for status display. When the LEDs are used for status display, a separate object is available for each LED. The status can also be displayed as inverted.

Assigning parameters to the shutter output Shutter Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 12 Shutter Up / Down 1 Bit CW Shutter movement (Up / Down) is initiated with this object. The shutter is raised on receipt of a logic “0” and lowered on receipt of a logic “1”. 13 Louvres Open / Closed 1 Bit CW This object serves for louvre adjustment. The louvres are rotated downwards on receipt of a logic “0” and rotated upwards on receipt of a logic “1”. 14 Wind alarm Shutter up 1 Bit CW This object can be linked with a safety address e.g. from a wind sensor. In the idle state, the sensor sends a logic “0” at cyclic intervals. In the event of a wind alarm, it sends a logic “1”. In this case, the shutter switch moves the shutter into the safety position and blocks the operation of the shutter. This also happens if the wind sensor fails and is therefore no longer able to send cyclical “0” signals. This object is only available if the parameter “Safety (e.g. wind alarm)” has been set to “enabled”. 15 Shutter using

dimming Up/Down using Brighter/Darker

4 Bit CW

A dimming sensor can control a shutter via this object, whereby dimming brighter raises the shutter and dimming darker lowers the shutter. All the dimming telegrams are interpreted as an adjustment by 100%, as the actuator does not know the current position. For this reason, it is only advisable to configure the dimming sensor for “Dimming with stop telegram”. This object is only available if the parameter “Shutter control using dim. command” has been set to “enabled”. The object values of “Shutter” and “Louvres” are also inverted. This means that the object for the shutter that is controlled by a short push button action can be linked with the “Louvres” object. The louvres are thus opened by a short push button action of the upper contact (upper -> brighter; lower -> darker).

Page 10: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/9

Parameters

Parameters Settings Function Shutter

Roller blind The function of the shutter switch is set via this parameter. The parameter window changes depending on the function selected and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Function of louvres (step) using object, without

reverse step after stop using object, with reverse step after stop using shutter up/down with stop telegram

The reaction to the receipt of a louvre adjustment telegram at the louvre object is set via this parameter. “using object, without reverse step after stop”: The louvre adjustment command is carried out without a reverse step and the relay is opened once the period for louvre adjustment has elapsed. “using object, with reverse step after stop”: The louvre adjustment command is carried out with a reverse step and the relay is opened once the period for louvre adjustment has elapsed. In this setting, the parameter for setting the delay time is displayed. “using shutter up/down with stop telegram”: The louvre adjustment telegram is interpreted as a stop telegram for halting the shutter movement. The automatic opening of the relays is deactivated. In this setting, the louvre object changes and is displayed as a stop object. Time for shutter movement

10; 30 seconds 1; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 7; 8; 10; 12; 15; 20; 25; 30; 35; 40; 60; 90; 120 minutes

This parameter indicates the duration of the shutter movement before the shutter is automatically switched off. It is not displayed if the parameter “Function of louvres (step)” is set to “using shutter up/down with stop telegram”.

Parameters Settings Time for louvres adjustment

50; 80; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180; 200; 220; 240; 260; 280; 300; 360; 400; 500; 700; 800; 1000 milliseconds

This parameter defines the period for louvre adjustment. It is not displayed if the parameter “Function of louvres (step)” is set to “using shutter up/down with stop telegram”. Delay time on a direction change

50; 80; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180; 200; 220; 240; 260; 280; 300; 360; 400; 500; 700; 800; 1000 milliseconds

The duration of a reverse step is defined using this parameter. It is not displayed if the parameter “Function of louvres (step)” is set to “using shutter up/down with stop telegram”. Pause on change in direction

10 milliseconds 40 milliseconds 70 milliseconds 100 milliseconds 200 milliseconds 400 milliseconds 700 milliseconds 1 second 2 seconds 4 seconds

The pause on change in direction is set via this parameter. The shutter remains stationary for the duration of the period. Note: The parameter must be set to the time given by the manufacturer of the shutter (generally longer than 500 ms). Shutter control using dim. command

disabled (standard) enabled (Up/Down are changed)

This parameter controls whether a 4 bit object is made available for shutter control. It is therefore possible for a dimming sensor to control a shutter, whereby dimming brighter raises the shutter and dimming darker lowers the shutter. All the dimming telegrams are interpreted as an adjustment by 100% since the actuator does not know the current position. For this reason, it is only advisable to configure the dimming sensor for “Dimming with stop telegram”. If the setting “enabled” is selected, the corresponding object is displayed in the object list. Behaviour on bus voltage failure

move shutter up move shutter down STOP

This parameter indicates the behaviour of the shutter on bus voltage failure. In the event of bus voltage failure, the pause on change in direction that is normally observed is not taken into consideration. Note: When operating heavy shutter motors, the setting “STOP” should be selected in order to protect the relay contacts.

Page 11: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/10

Parameters Settings Safety (e.g. wind alarm)

disabled enabled

The safety function can be enabled or disabled via this parameter. This parameter must be enabled when a wind sensor is being used. Safety position of shutter Up

This parameter indicates the limit position of the shutter in the event of a safety alarm. The parameter only appears if the safety function has been enabled. The safety position cannot be changed. Monitoring time

12 minutes

The monitoring time is specified with this parameter. The safety object expects to receive cyclical telegrams (“0” signals). If the shutter actuator does not receive a signal within the monitoring period, the safety function is initiated.

Roller blind Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 12 Roller blinds Up / Down 1 Bit CW The movement of the roller blind (Up / Down) is initiated with this object. The blind is raised on receipt of a logic “0” and lowered on receipt of a logic “1”. 13 Roller blinds STOP 1 Bit CW This object serves as a receiving object for stopping the movement of the roller blind. 14 Wind alarm Roller blinds

up 1 Bit CW

This object can be linked with a safety address e.g. from a wind sensor. In the idle state, the sensor sends a logic “0” at cyclic intervals. In the event of wind alarm, it sends a logic “1”. In this case, the shutter switch moves the roller blind into the set safety position (Up or Down) and blocks the operation of the roller blind. This also happens if the wind sensor fails and is therefore no longer able to send cyclical “0” signals. This object is only available if the parameter “Safety (e.g. wind alarm)” is set to “enabled”.

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 15 Roller blinds

using dim. command

Up/Down using Brighter/Darker

4 Bit CW

A dimming sensor can control a roller blind via this object, whereby dimming brighter raises the blind and dimming darker lowers the blind. All the dimming telegrams are interpreted as an adjustment by 100%, as the actuator does not know the current position. For this reason, it is only advisable to configure the dimming sensor for “Dimming with stop telegram”. This object is only available if the parameter “Roller blinds control using dim. command” has been set to “enabled”. The object value of the “Roller blinds” object is also inverted. This means that the object for the roller blind that is controlled by a short push button action can be linked with the “Roller blinds” object. The roller blind is thus raised by a short push button action of the upper contact (upper -> brighter; lower -> darker).

Parameters

Parameters Settings Function Shutter

Roller blind The function of the shutter switch is set via this parameter. The parameter window changes depending on the function selected and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Automatically stop roller blinds movement

disabled enabled

This parameter indicates whether the relay is automatically opened once the travel time for the roller blinds has elapsed. If “enabled” is selected, the parameter “Time for roller blinds movement” appears for setting the travel time. Time for roller blinds movement

10; 30 seconds 1; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 7; 8; 10; 12; 15; 20; 25; 30; 35; 40; 60; 90; 120 minutes

This parameter indicates the duration of the roller blind movement before the blind is automatically switched off. It is not displayed if the parameter “Automatically stop roller blinds movement” is set to “disabled”.

Page 12: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/11

Parameters Settings Pause on change in direction

10 milliseconds 40 milliseconds 70 milliseconds 100 milliseconds 200 milliseconds 400 milliseconds 700 milliseconds 1 second 2 seconds 4 seconds

The pause on change in direction is set via this parameter. The roller blind remains stationary for the duration of the period. Note: The parameter must be set to the time given by the manufacturer of the roller blind (generally longer than 500 ms). Roller blinds control using dim. command

disabled (standard) enabled (Up/Down are changed)

This parameter controls whether a 4 bit object is made available for controlling the roller blind. It is therefore possible for a dimming sensor to control a roller blind, whereby dimming brighter raises the blind and dimming darker lowers the blind. All the dimming telegrams are interpreted as an adjustment by 100% since the actuator does not know the current position. For this reason, it is only advisable to configure the dimming sensor for “Dimming with stop telegram”. If the setting “enabled” is selected, the corresponding object is also displayed in the object list. Behaviour on bus voltage failure

move shutter up move shutter down STOP

This parameter indicates the behaviour of the roller blind on bus voltage failure. Note: When operating heavy roller blind motors, the setting “STOP” should be selected in order to protect the relay contacts. Safety (e.g. wind alarm)

disabled enabled

The safety function can be enabled or disabled via this parameter. This parameter must be enabled when a wind sensor is being used. Safety position of roller blinds

Up Down

This parameter indicates the limit position of the roller blind in the event of a safety alarm. The parameter only appears if the safety function has been enabled. Monitoring time

12 minutes

The safety object expects to receive cyclical telegrams (“0” signals). If these telegrams fail to appear, the safety function is triggered and the roller blind is moved to the safety position.The monitoring time is specified with this parameter. If the shutter actuator does not receive a signal within the monitoring period, the safety function is initiated.

Times The times cannot be kept to exactly for reasons associated with the internal operating system. The following tables indicate the time bands that are applied. Reversal in change of direction

Time [ms] Time from

[ms] Time to [ms]

10 9.5 - 10.0 20 19.5 - 20.0 40 39.5 - 40.0 70 69.5 - 70.0 100 99.5 - 100.0 200 192.0 - 200.0 400 392.0 - 400.0 700 696.0 - 704.0 1,000 992.0 - 1000.0 2,000 1992.0 - 2000.0 4,000 3900.0 - 4030.0

Louvre adjustment time

Time [ms] Time from [ms] Time to [ms]

50 49.5 - 50.0 60 59.5 - 60.0 70 69.5 - 70.0 80 79.5 - 80.0

100 99.5 - 100.0 120 119.5 - 120.0 140 136.0 - 144.0 160 152.0 - 160.0 180 176.0 - 184.0 200 192.0 - 200.0 220 216.0 - 224.0 240 232.0 - 240.0 260 256.0 - 264.0 280 272.0 - 280.0 300 296.0 - 304.0 330 320.0 - 328.0 360 352.0 - 360.0 400 392.0 - 400.0 500 496.0 - 504.0 600 592.0 - 600.0 700 696.0 - 704.0 800 792.0 - 800.0

1,000 992.0 - 1000.0

Page 13: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/12

Travel time for shutters and blinds

Time [min] [ms]

Time [ms] from - to

Time [min] from - to

10,000 9880.0 - 10010.0 0.2 - 0.2 30,000 29900.0 - 30030.0 0.5 - 0.5

1 60,000 58800.0 - 60900.0 1.0 - 1.02 120,000 117600.0 - 119700.0 2.0 - 2.03 180,000 178500.0 - 180600.0 3.0 - 3.04 240,000 237300.0 - 239400.0 4.0 - 4.05 300,000 298200.0 - 300300.0 5.0 - 5.06 360,000 357000.0 - 359100.0 6.0 - 6.07 420,000 417900.0 - 420000.0 7.0 - 7.08 480,000 478800.0 - 480900.0 8.0 - 8.0

10 600,000 561000.0 - 594000.0 9.4 - 9.912 720,000 693000.0 - 726000.0 11.6 - 12.115 900,000 858000.0 - 891000.0 14.3 - 14.920 1,200,000 1155000.0 - 1188000.0 19.3 - 19.825 1,500,000 1452000.0 - 1485000.0 24.2 - 24.830 1,800,000 1782000.0 - 1815000.0 29.7 - 30.335 2,100,000 2079000.0 - 2112000.0 34.7 - 35.240 2,400,000 2376000.0 - 2409000.0 39.6 - 40.260 3,600,000 3564000.0 - 3597000.0 59.4 - 60.090 5,400,000 5379000.0 - 5412000.0 89.7 - 90.2

120 7,200,000 7161000.0 - 7194000.0 119.4 - 119.9 Safety times

Time [min] Time [ms] Time from

[ms] Time to [ms]

Time from [min]

Time

to [min]

2 120,000 132000.0 - 165000.0 2.2 - 2.84 240,000 264000.0 - 297000.0 4.4 - 5.08 480,000 495000.0 - 528000.0 8.3 - 8.8

12 720,000 726000.0 - 759000.0 12.1 - 12.720 1,200,000 1221000.0 - 1254000.0 20.4 - 20.930 1,800,000 1815000.0 - 1848000.0 30.3 - 30.845 2,700,000 2706000.0 - 2739000.0 45.1 - 45.760 3,600,000 3630000.0 - 3663000.0 60.5 - 61.1

Timing diagrams: Examples for a rocker 1. Configured for switch function:

upper “On”, lower “Off”

2. Configured for switch function:

upper “Toggle”, lower “press: On, release: Off”

3. Configured for switch function:

upper “8-bit Value”, lower “8-bit Value”

4. Configured for shutter: upper “Up”, lower “Down”

Open Closed

< 0.5s0.5s

< 0,5s 0.5s

Down Up

Upper rocker contact

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forlouvres object

Telegrams forshutter object

Upper rocker contact

Value

contactLower rocker

ValueValue

Value Value Value

Value telegramsfor object of upper

rocker contact

Value telegramsfor object of lower

rocker contact

Upper rocker contact

On OffOn OnOff

Lower rocker contact

On Off Off OffOn OnSwitching telegrams

for object of upperrocker contact

for object of lower rocker contact

Switching telegrams

Upper rocker contact

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forswitching object

On Off Off OffOn On On

Page 14: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Siemens AG 902502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.5.3/13

5. Configured for dimming with stop telegram

6. Configured for dimming with cyclical sending

On Off

Stop StopDarker Brighter

< 0.5s0.5s

< 0.5s 0.5sUpper rocker contact

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forswitching object

Telegrams fordimming object

On Off

< 0.5s

< 0.5s0.5s

0.5s

-1/8 -1/8 +1/8 +1/8 +1/8 +1/8-1/8

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forswitching object

Upper rocker contact

Telegrams fordimming object

Page 15: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Shutter 902502

Technical manual 902502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.5.3/14

Space for notes

Page 16: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Use of the application program Product family: Input/output Product type: Binary/binary Manufacturer: Siemens Name: Dimmer UP 525 Order no.: 5WG1 525-2AB01 Functional description With the application program “20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502”, it is possible to assign parameters to the dimmer output and to the 2-fold push button DELTA profil that is attached to its physical external interface. The two rockers of the push button can be used for the following functions: switching (on/off/toggle/value), dimming (on/off or brighter/darker), controlling shutters, skylights and security gates etc., recalling/programming scenes and for status display via LEDs. The dimmer output offers the following functions: switching on/off, dimming, setting the brightness value, sending the dimming status (8 bit), sending the switching status (1 bit) and setting brightness limits. Functions of the rockers Switching A separate communication object is available for each contact of the two rockers. It is therefore possible to switch up to four different groups of luminaires. It is possible to set via parameters which switch function (on/off/toggle) is carried out when the rocker is pressed or released. An 8 bit value can also be assigned to each rocker contact. The corresponding value is sent immediately once the rocker is pressed. It is therefore possible for a dimming actuator for example to be set to a defined value. Dimming It is possible to choose between the two dimming types: “Dimming with stop telegram” and “Dimming with cyclical sending”. A distinction is made between a short and long push button action. A switching command is sent after a short rocker operation while a long push button action generates a dimming command for dimming brighter or darker. Shutter control A distinction is made between a long and short push button action. A switching command for louvre adjustment is sent after a brief rocker operation while a long push button action generates a switching command for raising or lowering the shutter.

LED The push button has three LEDs. There are two communication objects available for the first two LEDs of the push button. These LEDs can be used either for displaying switching states or as an orientation light, if the corresponding parameters are selected. The third LED serves as an orientation light. Functions of the dimmer output Switching on/off A starting value (brightness value) can be set via parameters. This value is immediately selected on receipt of an On telegram. Dimming It is possible to set the “Dimming time”. On receipt of the step width, the actuator begins to change the brightness in the given direction at a set speed. Should a stop command be received before the end of the dimming process, the process is interrupted and the achieved brightness value is maintained. Setting the brightness value On receipt of a value telegram, the dimmer can be set to a defined value. It is possible to select whether the dimmer jumps or dims to this value. Sending the dimming status (8 bit) The current analogue brightness value of the dimmer is always made available via an 8 bit status object. The program also has an automatic sending mechanism for dynamically limiting the sending frequency. On the one hand, this dynamic limit should reduce the bus load and on the other hand it should react quickly to particular events. The status is sent immediately on receipt of a switching signal. However, on receipt of a signal to dim brighter/darker, the first signal is only sent after a delay of approx. 2 seconds. After each sending signal, the next sending time is calculated (exception: receipt of the switching signal). If the changes in brightness stop, the intervals between the sending periods are extended each time by 1 second. The maximum interval can be set (2 to 15 seconds). If there is no change in the brightness value before the next calculated sending time, the status is not sent and the interval is reset (2 seconds). Sending the switching status (1 bit) It is defined via a parameter whether the switching status is sent or not. If the switching state should be sent, it can also be defined whether the status is sent via the switching object or via another object (additional status object).

Siemens AG 903502, 8 pages Technical Manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.6.3/1

Page 17: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Brightness limits The application program has 2 possibilities for limiting the brightness level. A maximum and minimum brightness level can be set via the first limit. When dimming brighter, the maximum brightness level is the value set in the parameters. When dimming darker, the brightness value can only dim down to the minimum value selected. On receipt of a value signal, the signal is only accepted if the value lies between the minimum and maximum value. With the second limit, it is possible to set a dimming range. If e.g. the parameters for the first limit are set to maximum value = 100% and minimum value = 0%, then the maximum brightness value is limited to 80% via the second limit (e.g. min = 10%, max = 80%). The receipt of a value signal: 255 (100%) therefore corresponds to 80% brightness; the receipt of a value signal: 230 (90%) then corresponds to 73% brightness etc. This second limit is mainly used for hardware adaptation. It is therefore possible to limit the maximum and minimum control range for an object without restricting the permitted values.

Technical Manual 903502, 8 pages Siemens AG

Bus voltage recovery It is possible to set the behaviour on bus voltage recovery via parameters. Maximum number of group addresses: 38 Maximum number of associations: 38 Note The view of the communication objects can be arranged individually i.e. this view can vary depending on the parameters selected.

Assigning parameters to the rockers Switch Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 On Switch, Rocker A

(upper rocker contact)

1 Bit CT

1 Off Switch, Rocker A (lower rocker contact)

1 Bit CT

2 On Switch, Rocker B (upper rocker contact)

1 Bit CT

3 Off Switch, Rocker B (lower rocker contact)

1 Bit CT

The switching telegrams of both rockers are sent via the group addresses in these objects. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If “Toggle” is selected, all the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical.

Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.6.3/2

Page 18: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Siemens AG 903502, 8 pages Technical Manual

Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sendingScene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. The object types of object [0] and object [1] change automatically in the object list.

Upper contact Off On Toggle 8-bit Value press: On, release: Off press: Off, release: On

Lower contact Off On Toggle 8-bit Value press: On, release: Off press: Off, release: On

This parameter determines which switching value is sent via the corresponding switching object when the upper and lower rocker contacts are pressed or released. “On” or “Off”: Pressing the contact generates an On or Off telegram. There is no evaluation when the rocker is released. “Toggle”: The value in the switching object is inverted when the contact is pressed. There is no evaluation when the contact is released. “8-bit Value”: An adjustable 8 bit value is sent when the contact is pressed. When this setting is selected, an additional parameter is displayed where the value can be defined. There is no evaluation when the contact is released. “press: On, release: Off”: An On telegram is generated when the contact is pressed while releasing the contact produces an Off telegram. “press: Off, release: On”: An Off telegram is generated when the contact is pressed while releasing the contact produces an On telegram.

Dimming with stop telegram Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 On / Off Dimming On / Off,

Rocker A 1 Bit

CT

The switching telegrams of rocker A are sent via the group addresses in this object. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the upper or lower rocker contact is pressed. If “Toggle / Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. 1 Brighter /

Darker Dimming, Rocker A

4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker A and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action. It is possible to set via parameters which dimming telegrams are generated when the upper or lower rocker contact is pressed. 2 On / Off Dimming On / Off,

Rocker B 1 Bit

CT

The switching telegrams of rocker B are sent via the group addresses in this object. 3 Brighter /

Darker Dimming, Rocker B

4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker B and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sendingScene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. The object types of object [0] and object [1] change automatically in the object list (e.g. from “Switch 1 Bit” to “Dimming 4 Bit”).

Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.6.3/3

Page 19: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Technical Manual 903502, 8 pages Siemens AG

Parameters Settings Upper / Lower contact On / Off

Toggle / Toggle This parameter determines the switching value that is sent via the object when the upper and lower rocker contacts are pressed briefly. “On / Off”: Pressing the upper contact generates an On telegram while an Off telegram is sent when the lower contact is pressed. “Toggle / Toggle”: The value in the switching object is inverted when either contact is pressed. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If the rocker is pressed for longer than the set period, the push button detects a long rocker operation and sends dimming telegrams.

Dimming with cyclical sending Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 On / Off /

Toggle Dimming On / Off / Toggle, Rocker A

1 Bit

CWT

The switching telegrams of rocker A are sent via the group addresses in this object. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the upper or lower rocker contact is pressed. If “Toggle / Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. 1 Brighter /

Darker Dimming, Rocker A

4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker A and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action. It is possible to set via parameters which dimming telegrams are generated when the upper or lower rocker contact is pressed. 2 On / Off /

Toggle Dimming On / Off / Toggle, Rocker B

1 Bit

CWT

The switching telegrams of rocker B are sent via the group addresses in this object. 3 Brighter /

Darker Dimming, Rocker B

4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker B and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. The object types of object [0] and object [1] change automatically in the object list (e.g. from “Switch 1 Bit” to “Dimming 4 Bit”). Upper / Lower contact On / Off, Step = 1/1

On / Off, Step = 1/2 On / Off, Step = 1/4 On / Off, Step = 1/8 On / Off, Step = 1/16 On / Off, Step = 1/32 On / Off, Step = 1/64 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/1 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/4 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/8 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/16 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/32 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/64

This parameter determines which switching value is sent when the upper and lower contacts are pressed briefly. The change in the brightness value that is carried out by a dimming telegram when a long push button action is detected is also set here. For example, in the setting “Step = 1/8”, 8 dimming telegrams have to be sent in order to dim from 0% to 100%. “On / Off, Step = x”: A short operation of the upper contact generates an On telegram while an Off telegram is sent after the lower contact is pressed briefly. “Dim brighter” telegrams are sent if the upper contact is pressed for a long period while “Dim darker” telegrams are sent if the lower contact is pressed. “Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = x”: The value in the switching object is inverted after a short push button action.

Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.6.3/4

Page 20: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Siemens AG 903502, 8 pages Technical Manual

Parameters Settings Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If the rocker is pressed for longer than the set period, the push button detects a long rocker operation and sends dimming telegrams. Interval for cyclical sending 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

The repetition rate for cyclical sending after a long push button action is set here. The bus load should be taken into consideration when setting this interval.

Shutter Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 Open / Closed Louvres,

Rocker A 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command for louvre adjustment when rocker A is pressed briefly. It is possible to set via parameters which switching command is generated when the rocker is pressed. 1 Up / Down Shutter,

Rocker A 1 Bit CT

When rocker A is pressed for a long period, this object sends a switching command to lower or raise the shutters. It is possible to set via parameters which switching command is generated when the upper or lower rocker contacts are pressed. 2 Open / Closed Louvres,

Rocker B 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command for louvre adjustment when rocker B is pressed briefly 3 Up / Down Shutter,

Rocker B 1 Bit CT

When rocker B is pressed for a long period, this object sends a switching command to lower or raise the shutters

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sendingScene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. The object types of object [0] and object [1] change automatically in the object list (e.g. from “Switch 1 Bit” to “Louvres”). Upper / Lower contact Up / Down

Down / Up This parameter defines the function of the upper and lower rocker contacts. In the default setting, pressing the upper contact briefly opens the louvres by a step with an Off telegram. Pressing the lower contact closes the louvres by a step with an On telegram. Pressing the upper contact for a long period raises the shutter with an Off telegram while pressing the lower contact lowers the shutter with an On telegram. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If the rocker is pressed for longer than the set period, the push button detects a long rocker operation.

Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.6.3/5

Page 21: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Scene

Technical Manual 903502, 8 pages Siemens AG

Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 Recall Scene,

Rocker A 1 Bit CT

The telegrams for recalling the scene are sent via the group address in this object. On receipt of the telegram, the scene module sends the stored brightness values of the scene via the group objects to the switch/dim actuators that have been addressed. 1 Save Scene,

Rocker A 1 Bit CT

The programming telegrams are sent via the group address in this object to the corresponding scene module. 2 Recall Scene,

Rocker B 1 Bit CT

The telegrams for recalling the scene are sent via the group address in this object. On receipt of the telegram, the scene module sends the stored brightness values of the scene via the group objects to the switch/dim actuators that have been addressed. 3 Save Scene,

Rocker B 1 Bit CT

The programming telegrams are sent via the group address in this object to the corresponding scene module.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical.

Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sendingScene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. The object types of object [0] and object [1] change automatically in the object list (e.g. from “Switch 1 Bit” to “Scene”). Upper / Lower contact 0 / 1

1 / 0 This parameter sets the sending signal when the rocker is pressed (short or long rocker operation). Start to save scene at 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter indicates the length of time that the rocker must be operated to distinguish between recalling the scene and switching to programming mode. Shorter push button action than the set time: The scene is recalled. Longer push button action than the set time: The scene is switched to programming mode.

LED Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 8 Status LED left 1 Bit CRW

9 Status LED right 1 Bit CRW

The switching telegrams are received via the group addresses in these objects when the left and right LEDs are used for status display. If the parameter settings “On” or “Off” are selected, these objects are not displayed and have no function.

Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.6.3/6

Page 22: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Parameters

Siemens AG 903502, 8 pages Technical Manual

Parameters Settings Orientation light (LED) Off

On Using this parameter, the third LED can either be switched off or used as an orientation light. Function of left LED Off

On Status (via separate object) Inverted (via separate object)

Function of right LED Off On Status (via separate object) Inverted (via separate object)

With these parameters, the LEDs can be parameterised as an orientation light or for status display. When the LEDs are used for status display, there is a separate object available for each LED. The status can also be displayed as inverted.

Assigning parameters to dimmer output Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 12 On / Off Actuator,

Dimming On / Off 1 Bit CRWT

The switching output of the dimmer can be addressed via this object. The current switching state can also be queried. Changes in the current switching state due to dimming or setting the brightness value are also taken into consideration. 13 Brighter /

Darker Actuator, Dimming

4 Bit CT

The dimming telegram for dimming brighter or darker is received via this object.

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 14 8-bit Value Actuator, Value 1 Byte CW

The brightness value that is to be set is received via this object. 15 8-bit Value Actuator, Status 1 Byte CRT

This object serves as a sending object for the current status (brightness value) of the switch/dim actuator which can be read out via the bus (e.g. for visualisation purposes). 16 On / Off Actuator, Status 1 Bit CRT

The current switching state of the dimmer can be queried via this object. Changes in the current switching state due to dimming or setting the brightness value are also taken into consideration. This object only appears if the parameter “Send switch status via” has been set to “separate Status object”.

Dimming_1 Parameters

Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.6.3/7

Page 23: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

September 2001

20 A1 Actuator-BCU Dimming 903502

Technical Manual 903502, 8 pages Siemens AG

Parameters Settings Dimming range from … to 0% ... 100% (standard),

0% ... 90%, 0% ... 80%, 0% ... 70%, 0% ... 60%, 0% ... 50%, 10% ... 100%, 10% ... 90%, 10% ... 80%, 10% ... 70%, 10% ... 60%, 10% ... 50%, 20% ... 100%, 20% ... 90%, 20% ... 80%, 20% ... 70%, 20% ... 60%, 30% ... 100%, 30% ... 90%, 30% ... 80%, 30% ... 70%, 40% ... 100%, 40% ... 90%, 40% ... 80%, 50% ... 100%, 50% ... 90%

The dimming range (second limit) can be defined via this parameter. A maximum and minimum value can be set whereby the actual value is compressed and raised with an offset. It can therefore be adapted to the available hardware in special cases. Min. dimming value inside dimming range

0% (switching Off via dimming possible), 0.5%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 60%, 70%

The minimum dimming value of the first limit can be set via this parameter. When dimming darker, only this value can then be accepted as the minimum brightness value. Max. dimming value inside dimming range

100%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 40%, 30%

The maximum dimming value of the first limit can be set via this parameter. When dimming brighter, only this value can then be accepted as the maximum brightness value. Starting value inside dimming range not higher than max. dimming range

100%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, last value

In the setting “final value”, 100% is fundamentally used as a brightness value after a download. The value set in the parameters is ignored and only becomes “active” once the actuator has been switched on/off for the first time. Note: This value only comes into effect once object 12 “Dimming On / Off” has been activated. 8-bit Dimming value accept immediately

only accept on On This parameter defines whether the switch/dim actuator, when it is in the Off state, carries out a dimming value telegram that has been received via the bus (“accept immediately”) or whether the dimming value is stored and this dimming action is carried out on receipt of the next On telegram. 8-bit Dimming value jump

dimming

This parameter defines whether the switch/dim actuator immediately accepts the brightness value of a dimming value telegram that has been received via the bus (“jump”) or triggers the new value at a rate defined by the dimming time. Parameters Settings Factor for dimming time (5-255) (for 1/256 of maximum brightness)

30

Base for dimming time (for 1/256 of maximum brightness)

Time base 0.5 ms Time base 8.0 ms Time base 130 ms Time base 2.1 sec Time base 33 sec

The dimming time is set using the two parameters “Base” and “Factor” (Dimming time = Factor x Base). It determines the period that the dimming is carried out by 1/256. Send switch status via On / Off object

separate Status object not sending

The sending object for the switching state can be defined via this parameter. Max. disable time for status sending

2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds 7 seconds 10 seconds 15 seconds

The maximum disable time for the dynamic sending of the value status can be set via this parameter. When using brightness control or several dimmers, the highest possible value should be selected (10 or 15 seconds), as the bus load can otherwise be too high.

Dimming_2 Parameters

Parameters Settings Behaviour on bus voltage recovery

switch off switch on as before bus voltage failure

This parameter sets the behaviour of the output on bus voltage recovery.

Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.6.3/8

Page 24: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/1

Use of the application program Product family: Input/output Product type: Binary/binary Manufacturer: Siemens Name: Binary output UP 562/01 Order no.: 5WG1 562-2AB01 Functional description With the application program “20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502”, it is possible to assign parameters to the 2 outputs of the binary output UP 562/01 and to the 2-fold push button DELTA profil that is connected to its physical external interface. The two rockers of the push button can be used for switching (on/off/toggle/value), dimming (on/off or brighter/darker), controlling shutters, skylights and security gates etc., recalling/saving scenes and for status display via the LEDs. The binary outputs can be used for pure switch functions, as a time switch (staircase lighting function) and for switching with time delays, logic operation and positive drive. It is also possible to parameterise the behaviour on bus voltage failure and select the type of relay contact. Functions of the rockers Switching Each rocker contact (upper/lower) of the two rockers has its own communication object available. It is therefore possible to switch up to four different groups of luminaires. It is also possible to set via parameters which switch function (on/off/toggle) is carried out when the rocker is pressed or released. An 8 bit value can also be assigned to each rocker contact. The corresponding value is immediately sent when the rocker is pressed. It is therefore possible for a dimming actuator to be set to a defined value. A “bell function” is also possible. The On/Off signal is sent when the rocker is pressed and the inverse signal is sent when the rocker is released. Dimming A distinction is made between a short and long push button action. A short push button action sends a corresponding switching command (on, off or toggle). If the push button is pressed and held down for a longer period (the duration of which can be set), a dimming command is sent. The functions of “Dimming with stop telegram” and “Dimming with cyclical sending” are available. If “Dimming with stop telegram” is selected, a long push button action sends a command to the dimming object to dim by 100%. When the rocker is released, a stop command is sent. If “Dimming with

cyclical sending” is selected, a dimming command is sent at set intervals for the duration of the push button action. It is also possible to assign parameters to the adjustment of the brightness value per dimming command (e.g. adjust by 1/8). Shutter control A distinction is made between a short and long push button action. If the rocker is pressed briefly, a switching telegram is sent which adjusts the louvres or stops any shutter movement. After a long push button action, the shutters are either raised or lowered. When assigning parameters, it is possible to choose between “Upper contact: Up, Lower contact: Down” or vice versa. Skylights and security gates for example can be controlled in both directions using this parameter. In this case the Up command corresponds to the Off command and the Down command corresponds to the On command. Scene Using the “Scene function”, users are able to reprogram a scene module themselves without changing the project design in ETS i.e. they can assign brightness values or switching states to the individual groups of the respective scene. Two scenes can be recalled by pressing the rocker briefly (e.g. upper contact: scene 1, lower contact: scene 2) while a long rocker operation is used to program them. The scene is recalled via a 1 bit switching command, whereby scene 1 is recalled with a “0” telegram and scene 2 is recalled with a “1” telegram. It is possible to specify in the parameters which telegrams are sent by the upper and lower rocker contacts. The scene is saved via a 1 bit switching command, whereby scene 1 is saved with a “0” telegram and scene 2 is saved with a “1” telegram. An application with this type of function must also be used in the scene module. The application programs “12 C0 Scene 740701” and “12 C0 Scene 740801” are available. Before programming a scene, the actuators concerned must be set to the required brightness values or switching states using the sensors provided. The scene modules that have been addressed are requested on receipt of a telegram to scan the current brightness values and switching states of the actuators and to store them in the corresponding scene. A long rocker operation is indicated by the LED lighting up. It is possible to specify the period that distinguishes a short and long push button action.

Page 25: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/2

LED The push button has three LEDs. There are two communication objects available for the two upper LEDs of the push button. They can therefore either be used to display switching states or as an orientation light if the corresponding parameters have been selected. The third LED serves as an orientation light. Functions of the binary outputs Switching with On/Off delay (normal mode) If an On delay has been assigned, the On signal is routed with a delay (to the OR function). If a further On signal is received during the On delay, the period is restarted. In the same way, a specified Off delay causes the Off signal to be routed with a delay. The Off delay is restarted if a further Off signal is received during this period. No changes occur however if an Off signal is received during the On delay or an On signal is received during the Off delay as the delay that is currently active is interrupted. If no time delays have been assigned, then the On/Off signal is routed immediately. Switching with On/Off delay (time switch) If an On delay has been assigned, the On signal is routed with a delay. If a further On signal is received during the On delay, the period is restarted. Once the On delay has elapsed, the On signal is routed and the Off delay is started simultaneously. The Off signal is routed once the period specified for the Off delay has elapsed. If a premature Off signal is received during the Off delay, the delay period is interrupted and the signal is routed immediately (=switching off prematurely). OR function The OR object input and the output of the time function form the two inputs of the OR function. If the OR function is enabled, both the inputs are linked with an OR logic operation and are available at the internal output of the OR function. If the OR function is disabled, the output of the time function is available directly at the internal output of the OR function. AND function The AND object input and the output of the OR function form the two inputs of the AND function. If the AND function is enabled, the two inputs are linked with an AND logic operation and are available at the internal output of the AND function. If the AND function is disabled, the output of the OR function is available directly at the internal output of the AND function.

Positive drive The input of the positive drive object and the output of the AND function form the two inputs of the positive drive. If the positive drive is enabled, the two inputs are linked as follows and are available at the internal output of the positive drive. The positive drive object is a 2 bit object. If bit 1 has the value 0, then the positive drive is regarded as “passive” and the output of the AND function is available directly at the output of the positive drive. This value is simultaneously loaded into bit 0 of the positive drive object so that the status is always contained in bit 0 of this object. If bit 1 of the positive drive object has the value 1, the positive drive is regarded as “active” and the output of the AND logic operation has no function. In this case, bit 0 of the positive drive object determines the value of the internal output of the positive drive. If the positive drive is disabled, the output of the AND function is available directly at the internal output of the positive drive.

Bit 1 Bit 0 Function 0 0 Disabled positive drive 0 1 Disabled positive drive 1 0 Switch off with positive drive 1 1 Switch on with positive drive

Status object After each switching operation, the status object is updated accordingly and automatically sent. It is possible to disable the automatic sending of the object via parameters so that the relay state is only achieved by scanning this object specifically. Bus voltage failure / bus voltage recovery The program always stores all the object values on bus voltage failure. It is also possible to assign a switching operation to the relay. On bus voltage recovery, these object values are read back first of all. They are then modified according to the parameters selected. The relay state is then produced from the object values and the corresponding system configuration (logic operations....).

Page 26: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/3

Block diagram of a channel

Switch

Positive drive

Objects ofchannel A

Relay

ORfunction

Status

t

Time function

ANDfunction

Positivedrive

Logic operation

> 1

>1&

&

1 Bit 0

Logic operation

&

Maximum number of group addresses: 38 Maximum number of associations: 38 Note The view of the communication objects can be arranged individually i.e. this view can vary depending on the parameters selected. Assigning parameters to the rockers Switch Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Switch, Rocker A

(upper rocker contact)

On 1 Bit CT

1 Switch, Rocker A (lower rocker contact)

Off 1 Bit CT

The switching telegrams of rocker A are sent via the group addresses in this object. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If “Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor.

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 2 Switch, Rocker B

(upper rocker contact)

On 1 Bit CT

3 Switch, Rocker B(lower rocker contact)

Off 1 Bit CT

The switching telegrams of rocker B are sent via the group addresses in this object. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If “Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper contact Off

On Toggle 8-bit Value press: On, release: Off press: Off, release: On

Lower contact Off On Toggle 8-bit Value press: On, release: Off press: Off, release: On

This parameter determines which switching value is sent via the corresponding switching object when the upper and lower rocker contacts are pressed or released. “On” or “Off”: Pressing the contact generates an On or Off telegram. There is no evaluation when the rocker is released. “Toggle”: The value in the switching object is inverted when the contact is pressed. There is no evaluation when the contact is released.

Page 27: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/4

Parameters Settings “8-bit Value”: An adjustable 8 bit value is sent when the contact is pressed. When this setting is selected, an additional parameter is displayed where the value can be defined. “press: On, release: Off”: An On telegram is generated when the contact is pressed while releasing the contact produces an Off telegram. “press: Off, release: On”: An Off telegram is generated when the contact is pressed while releasing the contact produces an On telegram.

Dimming with stop telegram Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Dimming On /

Off, Rocker A On / Off 1 Bit

CT

The switching telegrams of rocker A are sent via the group addresses in this object. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If “Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. A stop telegram is sent when the push button is released. 1 Dimming,

Rocker A Brighter / Darker 4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker A and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action. It is possible to set via parameters which dimming telegrams are generated when the upper or lower rocker contact is pressed. 2 Dimming On /

Off, Rocker B On / Off 1 Bit

CT

The switching telegrams of rocker B are sent via the group addresses in this object. 3 Dimming,

Rocker B Brighter / Darker 4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker B and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegramDimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact On / Off

Toggle / Toggle This parameter determines the switching value that is sent via the object when the upper and lower rocker contacts are pressed. “On / Off”: Pressing the upper contact generates an On telegram while an Off telegram is sent when the lower contact is pressed. “Toggle / Toggle”: The value in the switching object is inverted when either contact is pressed. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If the rocker is pressed for longer than the set period, the push button detects a long rocker operation and sends dimming telegrams.

Dimming with cyclical sending Communication objects

Page 28: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/5

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Dimming On / Off /

Toggle, Rocker A On / Off / Toggle

1 Bit

CWT

The switching telegrams of rocker A are sent via the group addresses in this object. It is possible to set via parameters which switching state is generated when the rocker is pressed or released. If “Toggle” is selected, the central addresses that are also contained in the actuator must be entered in order to synchronise the sensor. 1 Dimming,

Rocker A Brighter / Darker

4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker A and sends a dimming telegram after a long push button action. It is possible to set via parameters which dimming telegrams are generated when the upper or lower rocker contact is pressed. 2 Dimming On / Off /

Toggle, Rocker B On / Off / Toggle

1 Bit

CWT

The switching telegrams of rocker B are sent via the group addresses in this object. 3 Dimming,

Rocker B Brighter / Darker

4 Bit

CT

This object serves as a dimming object for rocker B and sends dimming telegrams after a long push button action.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings.

Parameters Settings Upper / Lower contact On / Off, Step = 1/1

On / Off, Step = 1/2 On / Off, Step = 1/4 On / Off, Step = 1/8 On / Off, Step = 1/16 On / Off, Step = 1/32 On / Off, Step = 1/64 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/1 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/4 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/8 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/16 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/32 Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = 1/64

This parameter determines which switching value is sent when the upper and lower contacts are pressed briefly. The change in the brightness value that is carried out by a dimming telegram when a long push button action is detected is also set here. For example, in the setting “Step = 1/8”, 8 dimming telegrams have to be sent in order to dim from 0% to 100%. “On / Off, Step = x”: A short operation of the upper contact generates an On telegram while an Off telegram is sent after the lower contact is pressed briefly. “Dim brighter” telegrams are sent if the upper contact is pressed for a long period while “Dim darker” telegrams are sent if the lower contact is pressed. “Toggle / Toggle, adjustment = x”: The value in the switching object is inverted after a short push button action. The dimming function remains the same as for the setting “On / Off, Step = x”. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If the rocker is pressed for longer than the set period, the push button detects a long rocker operation and sends dimming telegrams. Interval for cyclical sending 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

The repetition rate for cyclical sending after a long push button action is set here. The bus load should be taken into consideration when setting this interval.

Page 29: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/6

Shutter Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Louvres,

Rocker A Open / Closed 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command for louvre adjustment when rocker A is pressed briefly. It is possible to set via parameters which switching command is generated when the rocker is pressed. 1 Shutter,

Rocker A Up / Down 1 Bit CT

When rocker A is pressed for a long period, this object sends a switching command to lower or raise the shutters. It is possible to set via parameters which switching command is generated when the upper or lower rocker contacts are pressed. 2 Louvres,

Rocker A Open / Closed 1 Bit CT

This object sends a switching command for louvre adjustment when rocker B is pressed briefly. 3 Shutter,

Rocker B Up / Down 1 Bit CT

When rocker B is pressed for a long period, this object sends a switching command to lower or raise the shutters.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical.

Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sending Scene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact Up / Down

Down / Up This parameter defines the function of the upper and lower rocker contacts. In the default setting, pressing the upper contact briefly opens the louvres by a step with an Off telegram. Pressing the lower rocker closes the louvres by a step with an On telegram. Pressing the upper contact for a long period raises the shutter with an Off telegram while pressing the lower contact lowers the shutter with an On telegram. Long switch operation min. 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter defines the time limit for a short/long rocker operation. If a rocker is pressed for longer than the set time, the push button detects a long push button action.

Scene Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Scene,

Rocker A Recall 1 Bit CT

The telegrams for recalling scenes are sent via the group address in this object. On receipt of the telegram, the scene module sends the stored brightness values of the scene via the group objects to the switch/dim actuators that have been addressed. 1 Scene,

Rocker A Save 1 Bit CT

The programming telegrams are sent via the group address in this object to the corresponding scene module.

Page 30: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/7

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 2 Scene,

Rocker B Recall 1 Bit CT

The telegrams for recalling scenes are sent via the group address in this object. 3 Scene,

Rocker B Save 1 Bit CT

The programming telegrams are sent via the group address in this object to the corresponding scene module.

Parameters

The function and parameters of rockers A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Function of left rocker Switch

Shutter Dimming with stop telegram Dimming with cyclical sendingScene (recall / program)

The function of the rocker is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Rocker A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Upper / Lower contact 0 / 1

1 / 0 This parameter defines the sending signal when the rocker contacts are pressed. “0 / 1”: When the upper contact is pressed briefly, scene 1 is set with a “0” telegram by the scene modules that have been addressed. In the same way, scene 2 is set with a “1” telegram when the lower contact is pressed briefly. After a long push button action, these scene modules are requested on receipt of a telegram to scan the current brightness values and switching states of the actuators and to store them in the corresponding scenes. “1 / 0”: The assignment of scenes to the rocker contacts is inverted in this setting. Start to save scene at 0.3; 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0;

1.2; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 4.0; 5.0; 6.0; 7.0 seconds

This parameter indicates the length of time that the rocker must be operated to distinguish between recalling the scene and switching to programming mode. Shorter push button action than the set time: The scene is recalled. Longer push button action than the set time: The scene is switched to programming mode.

LED Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 8 LED left Status 1 Bit CRW

9 LED right Status 1 Bit CRW

The switching telegrams are received via the group addresses in these objects when the left and right LEDs are used to display the switching state. If the parameter settings “On” or “Off” are selected, these objects are not displayed and have no function.

Parameters

Parameters Settings Orientation light (LED) Off

On Using this parameter, the third LED can be switched off or used as an orientation light. Function of left LED Off

On Status (via separate object) Inverted (via separate object)

Function of right LED Off On Status (via separate object) Inverted (via separate object)

The LEDs can be parameterised as an orientation light or for status display. When the LEDs are used for status display, each LED has a separate object available. The status can also be displayed as inverted.

Page 31: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/8

Assigning parameters to the binary outputs Communication objects

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 12 Switch,

Channel A On / Off 1 Bit CW

13 Switch,

Channel B On / Off 1 Bit CW

The switching telegrams that are relayed via the time function to the OR function of channel A or B are received via the group addresses in these objects. 14 Status,

Channel A On / Off 1 Bit CRT

15 Status, Channel B

On / Off 1 Bit CRT

The current switching states of the relay channels are stored in this object. The object value is dependent on the switching telegrams to switching object 12 or 13 as well as on the state of the objects for logic operation and positive drive. The parameter settings “normally open contact” and “normally closed contact” for the relay mode do not influence the object value. No telegrams are sent if there is a change in the object value. The switching state can be read out via the ETS program or a visualisation terminal. 16 Logic operation,

Channel A OR function 1 Bit CRW

17 Logic operation,

Channel B OR function 1 Bit CRW

18 Logic operation,

Channel A AND function 1 Bit CRW

19 Logic operation,

Channel B AND function 1 Bit CRW

The switching information for the logic operation inputs of channel A or B is received via the group addresses in these objects. If “no logic operation” is selected in the relevant parameters, these objects have no function.

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 20 Positive drive,

Channel A On / Off 2 Bit CRT

21 Positive drive, Channel B

On / Off 2 Bit CRT

The switching telegrams for the positive drive of relay channels A and B are received via the group addresses in these objects. The positive drive is not active for the object values "0” and “1”. The switching state is assigned by the internal output of the AND function. Object value “2” switches off with positive drive while object value “3” switches on with positive drive. This overrides the state that was set by the output. Disabling the positive drive via a telegram with the value “0” or “1” causes the relay to be operated in the state that was defined by the output.

Normal mode: Parameters Relay A

The function and parameters of channels A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Channel A enabled

disabled The corresponding channel can be disabled (not used) or enabled via this parameter. If “disabled” is selected, the following parameters are no longer displayed. Operating mode Normal mode

Time switch The function of the channel is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Relay A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings.

Page 32: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/9

Parameters Settings Relay mode normally open contact

normally closed contact This parameter defines the behaviour of the relay contact. “normally open contact”: Off telegram = contact open, On telegram = contact closed. “normally closed contact”: Off telegram = contact closed, On telegram = contact open. On / Off delay enabled

disabled The On/Off delay can be disabled (not used) or enabled via this parameter. If “disabled” is selected, the parameters that are used for setting the time delays are no longer displayed. Base for Off delay Time base 130 ms

Time base 260 ms Time base 520 ms Time base 1 sec Time base 2.1 sec Time base 4.2 sec Time base 8.4 sec Time base 17 sec Time base 34 sec Time base 1.1 min Time base 2.2 min Time base 4.5 min Time base 9 min Time base 18 min Time base 35 min Time base 1.2 hr

Factor for Off delay ( 5-127 ) 5 The time for the “Off delay” is set here. This is calculated from the selected base multiplied by the factor that is entered here. Note: An attempt should always be made to set the required time with the smallest possible base as the base that is selected here also simultaneously specifies the maximum timing error.

Parameters Settings Base for On delay Time base 130 ms

Time base 260 ms Time base 520 ms Time base 1 sec Time base 2.1 sec Time base 4.2 sec Time base 8.4 sec Time base 17 sec Time base 34 sec Time base 1.1 min Time base 2.2 min Time base 4.5 min Time base 9 min Time base 18 min Time base 35 min Time base 1.2 hr

Factor for On delay ( 5-127 ) 5 The time for the “On delay” is set here. This is calculated from the selected base multiplied by the factor that is entered here. Note: An attempt should always be made to set the required time with the smallest possible base as the base that is selected here also simultaneously specifies the maximum timing error. OR function (Prio. 3) no logic operation

OR function This parameter defines whether a logic operation should e carried out with the OR function object at the output of the time function. Logic operation AND (priority 2)

no logic operation AND function

This parameter defines whether a logic operation should be carried out with the AND function object at the output of the OR function.

Relay A-2

Parameters Settings Positive drive (priority 1) no positive drive

Positive drive Using this parameter, channel A can be controlled via a positive drive object. The positive drive input and the output of the AND function form the two inputs of the positive drive. If the positive drive is enabled, the two inputs are linked and are available at the internal output of the positive drive.

Page 33: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/10

Parameters Settings Behaviour on bus voltage failure

no action contact opens contact closes

The behaviour of the relay contact on bus voltage failure can be set here. “no action”: The relay contact maintains its current switching state on bus voltage failure. “contact closes”: The relay contact is closed on bus voltage failure. This reaction is not dependent on the relay mode that has been selected (normally open or normally closed contact). “contact opens”: The relay contact is opened on bus voltage failure. This reaction is not dependent on the relay mode that has been selected (normally open or normally closed contact). Initialisation value for switch/OR/AND/positive drive object

0 / 0 / 0 / 00 1 / 1 / 1 / 00 1 / 0 / 1 / 00 1 / 0 / 1 / 10 1 / 0 / 1 / 11 1 / 0 / 0 / 00 0 / 1 / 1 / 00 0 / 0 / 1 / 10 0 / 0 / 1 / 11 as before bus voltage failure

This parameter specifies the initialisation values of the objects. The first value (on the left) corresponds to the object value for switching, the second is the object value for the OR function, the third is for the AND function and the final value corresponds to the object value for positive drive. Status transmit on change of

object value using read request

This parameter defines the behaviour of the status object. (It controls the “transmission” flag of the object parameters). “transmit on change of object value”: If the object value has changed, a corresponding telegram is sent. “using read request”: The status object only sends the status after a read request.

Note If the parameter “On / Off delay” is set to “disabled” while in normal mode, the parameters of parameter window “Relay A-2” are displayed in parameter window “Relay A” instead where they can be set as required. The parameter window “Relay A-2” is not displayed in this case.

Time switch: Parameters Relay A

The function and parameters of channels A and B are identical. Parameters Settings Channel A enabled

disabled The corresponding channel can be disabled (not used) or enabled via this parameter. If “disabled” is selected, the following parameters are no longer displayed. Operating mode Normal mode

Time switch The function of the channel is set via this parameter. The parameter window “Relay A” changes depending on the function that is selected here and the relevant parameters are displayed with default settings. Relay mode normally open contact

normally closed contact This parameter defines the behaviour of the relay contact. “normally open contact”: Off telegram = contact open, On telegram = contact closed. “normally closed contact”: Off telegram = contact closed, On telegram = contact open.

Page 34: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/11

Parameters Settings Base for Off delay Time base 130 ms

Time base 260 ms Time base 520 ms Time base 1 sec Time base 2.1 sec Time base 4.2 sec Time base 8.4 sec Time base 17 sec Time base 34 sec Time base 1.1 min Time base 2.2 min Time base 4.5 min Time base 9 min Time base 18 min Time base 35 min Time base 1.2 hr

Factor for Off delay ( 5-127 ) 5 The time for the “Off delay” is set here. This is calculated from the selected base multiplied by the factor that is entered here. Note: An attempt should always be made to set the required time with the smallest possible base as the base that is selected here also simultaneously specifies the maximum timing error. Base for On delay Time base 130 ms

Time base 260 ms Time base 520 ms Time base 1 sec Time base 2.1 sec Time base 4.2 sec Time base 8.4 sec Time base 17 sec Time base 34 sec Time base 1.1 min Time base 2.2 min Time base 4.5 min Time base 9 min Time base 18 min Time base 35 min Time base 1.2 hr

Factor for On delay (0-127 ) 0 The time for the “On delay” is set here. This is calculated from the selected base multiplied by the factor that is entered here. Note: An attempt should always be made to set the required time with the smallest possible base as the base that is selected here also simultaneously specifies the maximum timing error. OR function (Prio. 3) no logic operation

OR function This parameter defines whether a logic operation should be carried out with the OR function object at the output of the time function. Logic operation AND (priority 2)

no logic operation AND function

This parameter defines whether a logic operation should be carried out with the AND function object at the output of the OR function.

Parameters Settings Positive drive (priority 1) no positive drive

Positive drive Using this parameter, channel A can be controlled via a positive drive object. The positive drive input and the output of the AND function form the two inputs of the positive drive. If the positive drive is enabled, the two inputs are linked and are available at the internal output of the positive drive.

Relay A-2

Parameters Settings Behaviour on bus voltage failure

no action contact opens contact closes

The behaviour of the relay contact on bus voltage failure can be set here. “no action”: The relay contact maintains its current switching state on bus voltage failure. “contact closes”: The relay contact is closed on bus voltage failure. This reaction is not dependent on the relay mode that has been selected (normally open or normally closed contact). “contact opens”: The relay contact is opened on bus voltage failure. This reaction is not dependent on the relay mode that has been selected (normally open or normally closed contact). Initialisation value for switch/AND/OR/positive drive object

0 / 0 / 0 / 00 1 / 1 / 1 / 00 1 / 0 / 1 / 00 1 / 0 / 1 / 10 1 / 0 / 1 / 11 1 / 0 / 0 / 00 0 / 1 / 1 / 00 0 / 0 / 1 / 10 0 / 0 / 1 / 11 as before bus voltage failure

This parameter specifies the initialisation values of the objects. The first value (on the left) corresponds to the object value for switching, the second is the object value for the OR function, the third is for the AND function and the final value corresponds to the object value for positive drive.

Page 35: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/12

Parameters Settings Status transmit on change of

object value using read request

This parameter defines the behaviour of the status object. (It controls the “transmission” flag of the object parameters). “transmit on change of object value”: If the object value has changed, a corresponding telegram is sent. “using read request”: The status object only sends the status after a read request.

The functions and parameters of relay A and B are identical. Timing diagrams: Examples for a push button 1. Configured for switch function:

upper “On”, lower “Off”

2. Configured for switch function:

upper “Toggle”, lower “press: On, release: Off”

3. Configured for switch function: upper “8-bit Value”, lower “8-bit Value”

4. Configured for shutter: upper “Up”, lower “Down”

Open Closed

< 0.5s0.5s

< 0.5s 0.5s

Down Up

Upper rocker contact

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forlouvres object

Telegrams forshutter object 5. Configured for dimming with stop telegram

6. Configured for dimming with cyclical sending

Upper rocker contact

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forswitching object

On Off Off OffOn On On

Upper rocker contact

On OffOn OnOff

Lower rocker contact

On Off Off OffOn OnSwitching telegrams

for object of upperrocker contact

for object of lower rocker contact

Switching telegrams

On Off

< 0.5s

< 0.5s0.5s

0.5s

-1/8 -1/8 +1/8 +1/8 +1/8 +1/8-1/8

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forswitching object

Upper rocker contact

Telegrams fordimming object

On Off

Stop StopDarker Brighter

< 0.5s0.5s

< 0.5s 0.5sUpper rocker contact

Lower rocker contact

Telegrams forswitching object

Telegrams fordimming object

contact

Value

contactLower rocker

ValueValue

Value Value Value

Upper rocker

Value telegramsfor object of upper

rocker contact

Value telegramsfor object of lower

rocker contact

Page 36: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Siemens AG 901502, 14 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.5.2.7.3/13

Timing diagrams: Examples for a channel 1. Switching without time delays, logic operation or

positive drive Switchingtelegrams

On Off On OffOn OffOff On

Relaycontact

OnOff

2. Switching with ON delay,

without logic operation or positive drive Switchingtelegrams

On Off On On OffOff On

Output fortime function

10

Relaycontact

OnOff

3. Switching with Off delay,

without logic operation or positive drive Switchingtelegrams

OnOff On Off OnOff Off

Output fortime function

10

Relaycontact

OnOff

4. Switching with On and Off delay, without logic operation or positive drive Switchingtelegrams

Output fortime function

Relaycontact

10

OnOff

On Off OnOff OffOn On

5. Switching with time switch function,

without logic operation or positive drive

On OnOffSwitchingtelegrams

Off On On

Output fortime function

10

Relaycontact

OnOff

6. Switching with AND function, without time delays or positive drive

10

AND gateInput 1

10

On

Off On)Off On OffOn Off

Switchingtelegrams

Logic operationtelegrams

Relaycontact

OnOff

On Off Off On OffOff On

AND gateInput 2

7. Switching with OR function and On delay, without positive drive

OR gateInput 1

10

OffOffOn OffOnLogic operationtelegrams

Relaycontact

OnOff

OR gateInput 2

Switchingtelegrams

On Off On On OffOff On

10

8. Switching with AND function and with On and

Off delay, without positive drive

AND gateInput 1

10

OffOn OffOnLogic operationtelegrams

Relaycontact

OnOff

AND gateInput 2

Switchingtelegrams

On Off OnOff OffOn On

10

Page 37: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program description

October 2001

20 A2 Actuator-BCU binary 901502

Technical manual 901502, 14 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.5.2.7.3/14

9. Switching with OR function and time switch function, without positive drive

OR gate Input 1

10

OffOn OffOnLogic operationtelegrams

Relaycontact

OnOff

OR gate Input 2

Switchingtelegrams

On OnOffOff On On

10

10. Switching without positive drive

Switchingtelegrams

On Off On OffOn OffOff On

Relaycontact

OnOff

Telegrams forpositive drive

00

Positive driveON / OFF

Switching state forpositive drive

11. Switching with positive drive

Switchingtelegrams

On Off On OffOn OffOff On

Relaycontact

OnOff

Telegrams forpositive drive

10 1100 01

Positive driveON / OFF

Switching state forpositive drive

00

Page 38: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���$��%LQDU\�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/35

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� 2XWSXW3URGXFW�W\SH� %LQDU\�2XWSXW���IROG0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH� %LQDU\�2XWSXW�1����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� %LQDU\�2XWSXW�*(����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

7KLV� DSSOLFDWLRQ� SURJUDP� DOORZV� \RX� WR� XVH� ERWKRXWSXWV�RI�D�ELQDU\�RXWSXW���IROG�IRU�SXUH�VZLWFKLQJ�WLPHG� VZLWFKLQJ� �VWDLUFDVH� OLJKWLQJ��� GHOD\HG� DQGORJLF�VZLWFKLQJ�WDVNV�$GGLWLRQDOO\��SDUDPHWHUV�DUH�SURYLGHG�WR�VSHFLI\�WKHUHVSRQVH� WR� EXV� YROWDJH� IDLOXUH�� DQG� WKH� UHOD\VFRQWDFW�W\SH�

%ORFN�GLDJUDP�RI�FKDQQHO�$

switching

logic operation

t

timing function

logic operation

ANDOR

objects channel A

relay

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

1RWH�� 7KH�RUGHU� RI� WKH�HQWULHV�PD\� YDU\� IURP� WKHDERYH�GXH�WR�LQGLYLGXDO�FXVWRPL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�WDEOH�

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJ

� &KDQQHO�$ 6ZLWFKLQJ ��ELW &:78UHFHLYH

7KLV�REMHFWV�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�DUH�XVHG�WR�UHFHLYH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�WKDW�DUH�IRUZDUGHG�WR�WKH�UHOD\�FKDQQHO�$�YLD�WKHWLPHU��:KHQ�XVLQJ�D�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ�WKH�WLPHUV�UHVXOW�LVWKH�ILUVW�LQSXW�RI�WKH�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ�DW�FKDQQHO�$�

� &KDQQHO�% 6ZLWFKLQJ ��ELW &:78UHFHLYH

7KLV�REMHFWV�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�DUH�XVHG�WR�UHFHLYH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�WKDW�DUH�IRUZDUGHG�WR�WKH�UHOD\�FKDQQHO�%�YLD�WKHWLPHU��:KHQ�XVLQJ�D�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ�WKH�WLPHUV�UHVXOW�LVWKH�ILUVW�LQSXW�RI�WKH�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ�DW�FKDQQHO�%�

� &KDQQHO�$ /RJLF�RSHUDWLRQ ��ELW &5:78UHFHLYH

7KLV�REMHFWV�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�DUH�XVHG�WR�UHFHLYH�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WR�WKH�VHFRQG�LQSXW�RI�WKH�ORJLFFRPELQDWLRQ�DW�FKDQQHO�$��:KHQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU��1RQ�GHOD\HGORJLF�RSHUDWLRQ��LV�VHW�WR��QR�ORJLFDO�RSHUDWLRQ��WKLV�REMHFW�LVQRW�XVHG�

� &KDQQHO�% /RJLF�RSHUDWLRQ ��ELW &5:78UHFHLYH

7KLV�REMHFWV�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�DUH�XVHG�WR�UHFHLYH�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WR�WKH�VHFRQG�LQSXW�RI�WKH�ORJLFFRPELQDWLRQ�DW�FKDQQHO�%��:KHQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU��1RQ�GHOD\HGORJLF�RSHUDWLRQ��LV�VHW�WR��QR�ORJLFDO�RSHUDWLRQ��WKLV�REMHFW�LVQRW�XVHG�

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� ��0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

3DUDPHWHUV

1RWH��7KH�VHTXHQFH�RI�WKH�SDUDPHWHUV�LQ�WKH�GH�VFULSWLRQ�LV�WKH�VDPH�DV�LQ�WKH�(76�VFUHHQ�VKRWV��7RKDYH�D�PRUH�SUHFLVH�GHVFULSWLRQ��WKH�WHUPV�XVHGDUH�SDUWO\�GLIIHUHQW�WR�WKH�(76�VFUHHQ�VKRWV�

&KDQQHO�$�

7KH�SDUDPHWHUV�RI�FKDQQHOV�%�FDQ�EH�VHWDFFRUGLQJO\�

Page 39: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���$��%LQDU\�������

3/36 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

6ZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�EDVH EDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH���VHFEDVH�WLPH�����VHFEDVH�WLPH�����VHFEDVH�WLPH�����VHFEDVH�WLPH����VHFEDVH�WLPH����VHFEDVH�WLPH�����PLQEDVH�WLPH�����PLQEDVH�WLPH�����PLQEDVH�WLPH���PLQEDVH�WLPH����PLQEDVH�WLPH����PLQEDVH�WLPH�����K

6ZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�IDFWRU�������

7KHVH�SDUDPHWHUV�UXOHV�WKH�GHOD\�WR�VZLWFK��RII���7KH�GHOD\SHULRG�LV�JHQHUDWHG�E\�PXOWLSO\LQJ�WKH�VSHFLILHG�EDVH�ZLWKWKH�VHOHFWHG�IDFWRU�

)DFWRU� ������1R�VZLWFK�RII�GHOD\��L�H��ORJLFDO����V�DUHIRUZDUGHG�LPPHGLDWHO\�

1RWH��$V�WKH�VSHFLILHG�EDVH�HTXDOV�WKH�PD[LPXP�WLPLQJHUURU��WKH�VPDOOHVW�SRVVLEOH�EDVH�VKRXOG�EH�XVHG�WR�HVWDEOLVKWKH�GHVLUHG�GHOD\�

6ZLWFK�RQ�GHOD\�EDVH EDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH���VHFEDVH�WLPH�����VHFEDVH�WLPH�����VHFEDVH�WLPH�����VHFEDVH�WLPH����VHFEDVH�WLPH����VHFEDVH�WLPH�����PLQEDVH�WLPH�����PLQEDVH�WLPH�����PLQEDVH�WLPH���PLQEDVH�WLPH����PLQEDVH�WLPH����PLQEDVH�WLPH�����K

6ZLWFK�RQ�GHOD\�IDFWRU�������

7KHVH�SDUDPHWHUV�UXOHV�WKH�GHOD\�WR�VZLWFK��RQ���7KH�GHOD\SHULRG�LV�JHQHUDWHG�E\�PXOWLSO\LQJ�WKH�VSHFLILHG�EDVH�ZLWKWKH�VHOHFWHG�IDFWRU�

)DFWRU� ������1R�VZLWFK�RQ�GHOD\��L�H��ORJLFDO����V�DUHIRUZDUGHG�LPPHGLDWHO\�

1RWH��$V�WKH�VSHFLILHG�EDVH�HTXDOV�WKH�PD[LPXP�WLPLQJHUURU��WKH�VPDOOHVW�SRVVLEOH�EDVH�VKRXOG�EH�XVHG�WR�HVWDEOLVKWKH�GHVLUHG�GHOD\�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

2SHUDWLQJ�PRGH QRUPDO�PRGHWLPH�VZLWFK�PRGH

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�WKH�VZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�PRGH�

�QRUPDO�PRGH���2Q�UHFHLYLQJ�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�YLD�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�REMHFW��WKH�VSHFLILHG�VZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�LV�VWDUWHG�(DFK�VXEVHTXHQW��RII��WHOHJUDP�UHFHLYHG�EHIRUH�WKH�SHULRGKDV�SDVVHG�UH�VWDUWV�WKH�GHOD\�DQHZ��:KHQ�WKH�GHOD\�SHULRGKDV�SDVVHG�ZLWKRXW�UHFHLYLQJ�D�IXUWKHU��RII��WHOHJUDP��D����WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�WR�WKH�RXWSXW��$Q��RQ��WHOHJUDP�FDQFHOV�WKHVZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�

�WLPH�VZLWFK�PRGH����2Q��WHOHJUDPV�UHFHLYHG�YLD�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�IRUZDUGHG�WR�WKH�RXWSXW�LPPHGLDWHO\�6LPXOWDQHRXVO\�WKH�VSHFLILHG�GHOD\�LV�VWDUWHG�LJQRULQJ�DQ\VZLWFK�RQ�GHOD\V��(DFK�VXEVHTXHQW��RQ��WHOHJUDP�UHFHLYHGEHIRUH�WKH�SHULRG�KDV�SDVVHG�UH�VWDUWV�WKH�GHOD\�DQHZ�:KHQWKH�GHOD\�SHULRG�KDV�SDVVHG�ZLWKRXW�UHFHLYLQJ�D�IXUWKHU��RQ�WHOHJUDP��D�����WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�WR�WKH�RXWSXW��$Q��RII�WHOHJUDP�FDQFHOV�WKH�VZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�DQG�LV�IRUZDUGHG�WR�WKHRXWSXW�LPPHGLDWHO\�

5HOD\�PRGH QRUPDOO\�RSHQQRUPDOO\�FORVHG

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWF�RI�WKH�RXWSXW�

�QRUPDOO\�RSHQ�� �RII��WHOHJUDP� �UHOD\�GURSV�RXW��RQ��WHOHJUDP� �UHOD\�SLFNV�XS�

�QRUPDOO\�FORVHG�� �RII��WHOHJUDP� �UHOD\�SLFNV�XS��RQ��WHOHJUDP� �UHOD\�GURSV�RXW��

1RQ�GHOD\HG�ORJLFRSHUDWLRQ

QR�ORJLF�RSHUDWLRQ25�RSHUDWLRQ$1'�RSHUDWLRQ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ�EHWZHHQ�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�REMHFW�DQG�WKH�ORJLF�REMHFW��7KH�ILUVW�LQSXW�RI�WKHORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ�UHFHLYHV�WKH�WHOHJUDPV�IURP�WKH�VZLWFKLQJREMHFW�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�VHWWLQJV�WR��RQ��DQG��RII��GHOD\V��7KHVHFRQG�LQSXW�XVHV�WKH�VWDWH�RI�WKH�ORJLF�REMHFW��7KH�ORJLFREMHFW�LV�QRW�VXEMHFW�WR�WKH�GHOD\�VHWWLQJV�DQG�WKHUHIRU�LVIRUZDUGHG�LPPHGLDWHO\�

�QR�ORJLF�RSHUDWLRQ���FRPELQDWLRQ���7HOHJUDPV�IURP�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�IRUZDUGHG�WR�WKH�UHOD\V�GLUHFWO\�VXEMHFWWR�WKH�VHOHFWHG��RQ��DQG��RII��GHOD\V��LJQRULQJ�WKH�ORJLF�REMHFW�

�25�RSHUDWLRQ���FRPELQDWLRQ���6ZLWFKLQJ�DQG�ORJLF�REMHFWV�DUHFRPELQHG�ZLWK�D�ORJLFDO�25�

�$1'�RSHUDWLRQ���FRPELQDWLRQ���6ZLWFKLQJ�DQG�ORJLF�REMHFWVDUH�FRPELQHG�ZLWK�D�ORJLFDO�$1'�

%HKDYLRXU�RQ�EXV�YROWDJHIDLOXUH

QR�FKDQJHUHOD\�SLFNV�XSUHOD\�GURSV�RXW

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�WKH�UHOD\�FRQWDFWV�UHVSRQVH�WR�EXVYROWDJH�IDLOXUH�DQG�UHVWRUDWLRQ�

�QR�FKDQJH���2Q�EXV�YROWDJH�IDLOXUH�DQG�UHVWRUDWLRQ�WKH�UHOD\FRQWDFW�PDLQWDLQV�LWV�FXUUHQW�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�

�UHOD\�SLFNV�XS���VZLWFK�RQ���2Q�EXV�YROWDJH�IDLOXUH�DQGUHVWRUDWLRQ�WKH�UHOD\�FRQWDFW�SLFNV�XS�LQ�WKH�VHWWLQJ��5HOD\PRGH��QRUPDOO\�RSHQ��DQG�GURSV�RXW�ZKHQ�XVLQJ��5HOD\PRGH��QRUPDOO\�FORVHG��

�UHOD\�GURSV�RXW���VZLWFK�RII���2Q�EXV�YROWDJH�IDLOXUH�DQGUHVWRUDWLRQ�WKH�UHOD\�FRQWDFW�GURSV�RXW�LQ�WKH�VHWWLQJ��5HOD\PRGH��QRUPDOO\�RSHQ��DQG�SLFNV�XS�ZKHQ�XVLQJ��5HOD\�PRGH�QRUPDOO\�FORVHG��

Page 40: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���$��%LQDU\�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/37

7LPLQJ�'LDJUDPV��&KDQQHO�([DPSOHV

�� 1RQ�GHOD\HG�VZLWFKLQJ�QR�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ

switchingtelegrams

on off on offon offoff on

on

off

contact assembly

�� 6ZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�VZLWFK�RQ�GHOD\�QR�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ

switchingtelegrams

on off on on offoff on

outputtiming function

10

contact assembly

on

off

�� 6ZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�VZLWFK�RII�GHOD\�QR�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ

switchingtelegrams

onoff on off onoff off

outputtiming function

10

contactassembly

on

off

�� 6ZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�RQ�DQG�RII�GHOD\�QR�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ

switchingtelegrams

outputtiming function

contact assembly

10

on

off

on off onoff offon on

�� 7LPHG�VZLWFKLQJ��QR�ORJLF�FRPELQDWLRQ

on onoffswitchingtelegrams

off on on

outputtiming function

10

contactassembly

on

off

1RWH��:KHQ�VHW�WR��WLPH�VZLWFK��PRGH�WKH�VZLWFKRQ�GHOD\�LV�LJQRUHG�

�� 1RQ�GHOD\HG�VZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�$1'�JDWH

10

AND gateinput 1

10

on

off onoff on offon off

switchingtelegrams

logic operationtelegrams

contact assembly

on

off

on off off on offoff on

AND gateinput 2

�� 6ZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�VZLWFK�RQ�GHOD\DQG�25�JDWH

OR gateinput 1

10

offoffon offonlogic operationtelegrams

contact assembly

on

off

OR gate input 2

switchingtelegrams

on off on on offoff on

10

�� 6ZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�RQ�DQG�RII�GHOD\DQG�$1'�JDWH

AND gateinput 1

10

offon offonlogic operationtelegrams

contactassembly

on

off

AND gate input 2

switchingtelegrams

on off onoff offon on

10

�� 7LPHG�VZLWFKLQJ�ZLWK�25�JDWH

OR gateinput 1

10

offon offonlogic operationtelegrams

contact assembly

on

off

OR gate input 2

switchingtelegrams

on onoffoff on on

10

Page 41: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��2Q�2II�������

3/276 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� 3XVK�%XWWRQ3URGXFW�W\SH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ����IROG0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�����WLWDQLXP�ZKLWH��'V

2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�����OLJKW�EURQ]H��'V

2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�����VODWH�JUH\DX��'V

2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�����WLWDQLXP�ZKLWH��'I

2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�����HOHFWULF�ZKLWH��'I

2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�����VDQG��'I

2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

7KH� GLIIHUHQW� SXVK� EXWWRQV� YDU\� LQ� GHVLJQ� DQGFRORXU�RQO\�

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

7KLV�DSSOLFDWLRQ�SURJUDP�DOORZV�\RX�WR�XVH�D�SXVKEXWWRQ���IROG�WR�VZLWFKLQJ�WDVNV��RQ�RII�RYHU��,QGLYLGXDO� FRPPXQLFDWLRQ� REMHFWV� DUH� SURYLGHG� WRERWK� VZLWFKLQJ� FRQWDFWV� �XSSHU�ORZHU�� RI� WKH� WZRURFNHUV�WR�FRQWUROOLQJ�RQH�JURXS�RI�OLJKWLQJ�HDFK��XSWR�D�WRWDO�RI� IRXU�JURXSV���3DUDPHWHUV�DUH�DYDLODEOHWR�VHOHFWLQJ�WKH�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ��RQ�RII��WRJJOH��WRSUHVVLQJ��SXVKLQJ��DQG�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�7KHUH�DUH�DOVR� LQGLYLGXDO�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFWV�WRERWK�/('V�WR�XVH�WKRVH�WR�GLVSOD\LQJ�REMHFW�VWDWHVRU�DV�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKWV�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

1RWH�� 7KH�RUGHU� RI� WKH�HQWULHV�PD\� YDU\� IURP� WKHDERYH�GXH�WR�LQGLYLGXDO�FXVWRPL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�WDEOH�

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJ

� 5RFNHU�OHIW 7RS ��ELW &:78VHQG

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�OHIW�URFNHU�WRS��7KH�SDUDPHWHU�5RFNHU�OHIW��5RFNHU�FRQWDFW�WRS��JRYHUQV�ZKHWKHU�SUHVVLQJWKH�URFNHU�LV�WR�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQG�UHOHDVLQJ�LWWKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV�RU�YLFH�YHUVD�

:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH���RYHU���DOO�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDOVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUH�DVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVWDOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ�

� 5RFNHU�OHIW %RWWRP ��ELW &:78VHQG

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�OHIW�URFNHU�ERWWRP��7KH�SDUDPHWHU�5RFNHU�OHIW��5RFNHU�FRQWDFW�ERWWRP��JRYHUQV�ZKHWKHUSUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�LV�WR�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQGUHOHDVLQJ�LW�WKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV�RU�YLFH�YHUVD�

:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH���RYHU���DOO�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDOVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUH�DVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVWDOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ�

� 5RFNHU�ULJKW 7RS ��ELW &:78VHQG

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�ULJKW�URFNHU�WRS��7KH�SDUDPHWHU�5RFNHU�ULJKW��5RFNHU�FRQWDFW�WRS��JRYHUQV�ZKHWKHU�SUHVVLQJWKH�URFNHU�LV�WR�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQG�UHOHDVLQJ�LWWKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV�RU�YLFH�YHUVD�

:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH���RYHU���DOO�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDOVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUH�DVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVWDOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ�

� 5RFNHU�ULJKW %RWWRP ��ELW &:78VHQG

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�ULJKW�URFNHU�ERWWRP��7KHSDUDPHWHU��5RFNHU�ULJKW��5RFNHU�FRQWDFW�ERWWRP��JRYHUQVZKHWKHU�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�LV�WR�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPVDQG�UHOHDVLQJ�LW�WKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV�RU�YLFH�YHUVD�

:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH���RYHU���DOO�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDOVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUH�DVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVWDOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ�

Page 42: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��2Q�2II�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/277

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJ

� /('V OHIW ��ELW &:78UHFHLYH

7KH�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�RI�WKLV�REMHFW�UHFHLYH�WKH�VZLWFKLQJDGGUHVVHV�ZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�OHIW�/('�WR�GLVSOD\LQJ�VZLWFKLQJVWDWHV��:KHQ�XVLQJ�LW�DV�DQ�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKW���DOZD\V�RQ���WKLVREMHFW�LV�QRW�XVHG�

� /('V PLGGOH ��ELW &:78UHFHLYH

7KH�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�RI�WKLV�REMHFW�UHFHLYH�WKH�VZLWFKLQJDGGUHVVHV�ZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�FHQWUH�/('�WR�GLVSOD\LQJVZLWFKLQJ�VWDWHV��:KHQ�XVLQJ�LW�DV�DQ�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKW��DOZD\V�RQ���WKLV�REMHFW�LV�QRW�XVHG�

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� �0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

3DUDPHWHUV

5RFNHU�/HIW�

7KH�SDUDPHWHUV�RI�WKH�ULJKW�URFNHU�FDQ�EH�VHWDFFRUGLQJO\�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

5RFNHU�FRQWDFW�WRS SUHVVLQJ��RQSUHVVLQJ��RIISUHVVLQJ��WRJJOHUHOHDVLQJ��RQUHOHDVLQJ��RIIUHOHDVH��WRJJOHSUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RIISUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RQSUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RQSUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RIIGLVDEOHG

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�DUH�VHQW�YLD�REMHFW>�@�RQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�

�SUHVVLQJ��RQ���3UHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�SURGXFHV�DQ��RQ�WHOHJUDP��5HOHDVH�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�SUHVVLQJ��RII���3UHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�SURGXFHV�DQ��RII�WHOHJUDP��5HOHDVH�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�SUHVVLQJ��WRJJOH���RYHU���2Q�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRSWHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW���RQ��RU��RII���DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKHDFWXDO�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH��,�H��DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�RQ�WKHILUVW�SUHVVLQJ�DFWLRQ�DQG�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�RQ�WKH�VHFRQG�RQH�HWF��5HOHDVH�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�UHOHDVLQJ��RQ���5HOHDVLQJ�URFNHU�WRS�SURGXFHV�DQ��RQ�WHOHJUDP��3UHVVLQJ�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�UHOHDVLQJ��RII���5HOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�SURGXFHV�DQ��RII�WHOHJUDP��3UHVVLQJ�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�UHOHDVH��WRJJOH���RYHU���2Q�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�WHOHJUDPVDUH�VHQW���RQ��RU��RII���DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKH�DFWXDOVZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�,�H��DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�RQ�WKH�ILUVWUHOHDVH�DFWLRQ�DQG�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�RQ�WKH�VHFRQG�RQH��HFW�3UHVVLQJ�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�SUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RII���2Q�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�DQ�RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW��RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�

�SUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RQ���2Q�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�DQ�RII��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW��RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�

�SUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RQ����2Q��WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQSUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�DQG�RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�LW�

�SUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RII����2II��WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQSUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�DQG�RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�LW�

�GLVDEOHG���1R�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�WRS

5RFNHU�FRQWDFW�ERWWRP SUHVVLQJ��RIISUHVVLQJ��RQSUHVVLQJ��WRJJOHUHOHDVLQJ��RQUHOHDVLQJ��RIIUHOHDVH��WRJJOHSUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RIISUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RQSUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RQSUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RIIGLVDEOHG

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�DUH�VHQW�YLD�REMHFW>�@�RQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�

�SUHVVLQJ��RQ���3UHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�SURGXFHV�DQ��RQ�WHOHJUDP��5HOHDVH�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�SUHVVLQJ��RII���3UHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�SURGXFHV�DQ��RII�WHOHJUDP��5HOHDVH�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�SUHVVLQJ��WRJJOH���RYHU���2Q�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRPWHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW���RQ��RU��RII���DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKHDFWXDO�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH��,�H��DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�RQ�WKHILUVW�SUHVVLQJ�DFWLRQ�DQG�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�RQ�WKH�VHFRQG�RQH�HWF��5HOHDVH�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�UHOHDVLQJ��RQ���5HOHDVLQJ�URFNHU�ERWWRP�SURGXFHV�DQ��RQ�WHOHJUDP��3UHVVLQJ�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�UHOHDVLQJ��RII���5HOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�SURGXFHV�DQ��RII�WHOHJUDP��3UHVVLQJ�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�UHOHDVH��WRJJOH���RYHU���2Q�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRPWHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW���RQ��RU��RII���DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKHDFWXDO�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�,�H��DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�RQ�WKH�ILUVWUHOHDVH�DFWLRQ�DQG�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�RQ�WKH�VHFRQG�RQH��HFW�3UHVVLQJ�DFWLRQV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�SUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RII���2Q�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRPDQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW��RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�LVVHQW�

�SUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RQ���2Q�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRPDQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW��RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�LVVHQW�

�SUHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RQ����2Q��WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQSUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�DQG�RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�LW�

�SUHVVLQJ��RII��UHOHDVLQJ��RII����2II��WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQSUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�DQG�RQ�UHOHDVLQJ�LW�

�GLVDEOHG���1R�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�SUHVVLQJ�WKH�URFNHUERWWRP

Page 43: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��2Q�2II�������

3/278 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

/('V�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

/('�OHIW /('�WR�VWDWXV��RII�/('�DOZD\V�RQ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�WKH�RSHUDWLQJ�PRGH�RI�WKH�OHIW�/('�

�/('�WR�VWDWXV��RII����7KH�/('�LV�VZLWFKHG�YLD�REMHFW�>�@�WRGLVSOD\LQJ�D�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH��,I�QR�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�DUHDVVLJQHG��WKH�/('�LV�GLVDEOHG�

�/('�DOZD\V�RQ���7KH�/('�LV�SHUPDQHQWO\�LOOXPLQDWHG�WR�XVHDV�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKW�

/('�PLGGOH /('�WR�VWDWXV��RII�/('�DOZD\V�RQ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�WKH�RSHUDWLQJ�PRGH�RI�WKH�PLGGOH/('��

�/('�WR�VWDWXV��RII����7KH�/('�LV�VZLWFKHG�YLD�REMHFW�>�@�WRGLVSOD\LQJ�D�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH��,I�QR�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�DUHDVVLJQHG��WKH�/('�LV�GLVDEOHG�

�/('�DOZD\V�RQ���7KH�/('�LV�SHUPDQHQWO\�LOOXPLQDWHG�WR�XVHDV�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKW�

7LPLQJ�'LDJUDPV��5RFNHU�([DPSOHV

�� �3UHVVLQJ��RQ��PRGH

on on on on

VZLWFK

RSHUDWLRQ

WHOHJUDPV

VZLWFKLQJ

REMHFW

�� �3UHVVLQJ��RII��PRGH

WHOHJUDPV

VZLWFKLQJ

REMHFW

off off off off

VZLWFK

RSHUDWLRQ

�� �5HOHDVLQJ��WRJJOH��PRGH

on off on off

VZLWFK

RSHUDWLRQ

WHOHJUDPV

VZLWFKLQJ

REMHFW

�� �3UHVVLQJ��RQ��UHOHDVLQJ��RII��PRGH

on off on off off onWHOHJUDPV

VZLWFKLQJ

REMHFW

VZLWFK

RSHUDWLRQ

Page 44: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��'LPPHU�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/279

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� 3XVK�%XWWRQ3URGXFW�W\SH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ����IROG0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�������IROG�WZ�'V2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�������IROG�KE�'V2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�������IROG�VJ�'V2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�������IROG�WZ�'I2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�������IROG�Z¹�'I2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�83�������IROG�VG�'I2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

7KLV� DSSOLFDWLRQ� SURJUDP� SURYLGHV� PRGHV� WRVZLWFKLQJ� �RQ�RII�� DQG� GLPPLQJ� �EULJKWHQ�GDUNHQ�WZR�JURXSV�RI�OLJKWV�ZLWK�D�SXVK�EXWWRQ���IROG��OHIWDQG�ULJKW�URFNHU��7KH� DSSOLFDWLRQ� GLIIHUV� EHWZHHQ� VKRUW� DQG� ORQJVZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV�2Q� D� VKRUW� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ� D� VZLWFKLQJ� WHOHJUDP�URFNHU�WRS���RQ���URFNHU�ERWWRP���RII���LV�VHQW��2Q�DORQJ� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ� D� GLPPLQJ� WHOHJUDP� LV� VHQW�URFNHU�WRS���EULJKWHQ���URFNHU�ERWWRP���GDUNHQ���)XUWKHUPRUH��WKH���/('V�RI�WKH�SXVK�EXWWRQ�FDQ�EHVHW�WR�GLVSOD\�REMHFW�VWDWHV�RU�XVHG�DV�RULHQWDWLRQOLJKWV�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

1RWH�� 7KH� RUGHU� RI� WKH� HQWULHV�PD\� YDU\� IURP� WKHDERYH�GXH�WR�LQGLYLGXDO�FXVWRPL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�WDEOH�

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

� /HIW�URFNHU 2Q�RII ��ELW &:78

7KLV�LV�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�REMHFW�WR�WKH�OHIW�URFNHU�2SHUDWLRQ�RI�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�VHQGV�DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�DQGRSHUDWLRQ�RI�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�VHQGV�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�

� /HIW�URFNHU 'LPPLQJ ��ELW &78

7KLV�LV�WKH�GLPPLQJ�REMHFW�WR�WKH�OHIW�URFNHU�DQG�VHQGV�DGLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDP�RQ�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�/RQJ�RSHUDWLRQ�RI�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�VHQGV�D��EULJKWHQ��WHOHJUDPDQG�ORQJ�RSHUDWLRQ�RI�URFNHU�ERWWRP�VHQGV�D��GDUNHQ�WHOHJUDP�

� 5LJKW�URFNHU 2Q�RII ��ELW &:78

7KLV�LV�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�REMHFW�WR�WKH�ULJKW�URFNHU�2SHUDWLRQ�RI�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�VHQGV�DQ��RQ��WHOHJUDP�DQGRSHUDWLRQ�RI�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�VHQGV�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP�

� 5LFKW�URFNH 'LPPLQJ ��ELW &78

7KLV�LV�WKH�GLPPLQJ�REMHFW�WR�WKH�ULJKW�URFNHU�DQG�VHQGV�DGLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDP�RQ�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�/RQJ�RSHUDWLRQ�RI�WKH�URFNHU�WRS�VHQGV�D��EULJKWHQ��WHOHJUDPDQG�ORQJ�RSHUDWLRQ�RI�URFNHU�ERWWRP�VHQGV�D��GDUNHQ�WHOHJUDP�

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� ��0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

3DUDPHWHUV

*HQHUDO�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

/HIW�/(' VWDWH�RI�REMHFW�>�@VWDWH�RI�REMHFW�>�@DOZD\V�RQDOZD\V�RII

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�ZKHWKHU�WKH�/('�LV�XVHG�WRGLVSOD\LQJ�REMHFW�VWDWHV�RU�DV�DQ�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKW�

&HQWUH�/(' VWDWH�RI�REMHFW�>�@VWDWH�RI�REMHFW�>�@DOZD\V�RQDOZD\V�RII

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�ZKHWKHU�WKH�/('�LV�XVHG�WRGLVSOD\LQJ�REMHFW�VWDWHV�RU�DV�DQ�RULHQWDWLRQ�OLJKW�

Page 45: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��'LPPHU�������

3/280 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

/('�PRGH OHIW��QRUPDO��PLG��QRUPDOOHIW��LQYHUWHG��PLG��LQYHUWHGOHIW��QRUPDO��PLG��LQYHUWHGOHIW��LQYHUWHG��PLG��QRUPDO

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�KRZ�WKH�WZR�/('V�DUH�WR�GLVSOD\�WKHREMHFW�VWDWH���PLG� �FHQWUH��

/RQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�PLQ� ������������������������������������������������VHF

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�RSHUDWLQJ�SHULRG�WR�JHQHUDWH�ORQJDQG�VKRUW�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV��2SHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ORQJHU�WKDQWKH�VHOHFWHG�SHULRG�SURGXFHV�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�

&\FOLF�VHQG�IUHTXHQF\ ������������������������������������������������VHF

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�WKH�IUHTXHQF\�WR�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ�RQ�DORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�ZKHQ�VHW�WR��GLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ�PRGH��&RQVLGHU�EXV�ORDG�ZKHQ�VHWWLQJ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQGIUHTXHQF\�

/HIW�5RFNHU�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

&RQILJXUDWLRQ�OHIW�VZLWFK�/HIW�URFNHU�PRGH�

GLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDPGLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJGLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDP��WRJJOHGLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��WRJJOH

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�WKH�OHIW�URFNHUV�RSHUDWLQJ�PRGH�&RQVLGHU�EXV�ORDG�ZKHQ�VHWWLQJ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQG�IUHTXHQF\�:KHQ�VHW�WR��GLP�������WRJJOH���D�WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW���RQ��RU�RII���RQ�D�VKRUW�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKHDFWXDO�VLJQDO�VWDWH�LQVWHDG�RI��RQ��ZKHQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHUWRS�DQG��RII��ZKHQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�

/RQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ DGMXVW�E\�����DGMXVW�E\����DGMXVW�E\����DGMXVW�E\����DGMXVW�E\�����DGMXVW�E\�����DGMXVW�E\�����

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�FKDQJH�LQ�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�DGLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDP�LV�WR�HVWDEOLVK�RQ�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�(�J��ZLWK�WKH�GHIDXOW�VHWWLQJ��������GLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDP��DORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�LQFUHDVHV�GHFUHDVHV�WKH�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\XQWLO�HLWKHU�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU��VHQGLQJ�WKH�VWRS�WHOHJUDP�RU�UHDFKLQJ�WKH�PD[LPXP�PLQLPXP�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�SRVVLEOH�$Q\�RWKHU�VHWWLQJ���DGMXVW�E\���������VKRXOG�EH�XVHG�ZLWK�WKH�GLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��RQO\��:KHQ�VHW�WR�H�J���DGMXVW�E\��������GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�UHTXLUHG�WR�FKDQJH�WKH�OLJKWLQWHQVLW\�IURP����WR������

5LJKW�5RFNHU�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

&RQILJXUDWLRQ�ULJKW�VZLWFK�/HIW�URFNHU�PRGH�

GLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDPGLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJGLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDP��WRJJOHGLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��WRJJOH

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�JRYHUQV�WKH�ULJKW�URFNHUV�RSHUDWLQJ�PRGH�&RQVLGHU�EXV�ORDG�ZKHQ�VHWWLQJ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQG�IUHTXHQF\�:KHQ�VHW�WR��GLP�������WRJJOH���D�WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW���RQ��RU�RII���RQ�D�VKRUW�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKHDFWXDO�VLJQDO�VWDWH�LQVWHDG�RI��RQ��ZKHQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHUWRS�DQG��RII��ZKHQ�RSHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�ERWWRP�

/RQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ DGMXVW�E\�����DGMXVW�E\����DGMXVW�E\����DGMXVW�E\����DGMXVW�E\�����DGMXVW�E\�����DGMXVW�E\�����

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�FKDQJH�LQ�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�DGLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDP�LV�WR�HVWDEOLVK�RQ�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�(�J��ZLWK�WKH�GHIDXOW�VHWWLQJ��������GLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDP��DORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�LQFUHDVHV�GHFUHDVHV�WKH�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\XQWLO�HLWKHU�UHOHDVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU��VHQGLQJ�WKH�VWRS�WHOHJUDP�RU�UHDFKLQJ�WKH�PD[LPXP�PLQLPXP�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�SRVVLEOH�$Q\�RWKHU�VHWWLQJ���DGMXVW�E\���������VKRXOG�EH�XVHG�ZLWK�WKH�GLP�E\�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��RQO\��:KHQ�VHW�WR�H�J���DGMXVW�E\��������GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�UHTXLUHG�WR�FKDQJH�WKH�OLJKWLQWHQVLW\�IURP����WR������

Page 46: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���$��'LPPHU�������

3/70 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� ,OOXPLQDWLRQ3URGXFW�W\SH� 'LPPHU0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH� 8QLYHUVDO�'LPPLQJ�'HYLFH�1����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

7KH�DSSOLFDWLRQ�SURJUDP�SURYLGHV�SDUDPHWHUV�WR�WKHWDVNV�EHORZ�ZLWK�D�XQLYHUVDO�GLPPLQJ�GHYLFH�

− 2Q�RII�VZLWFKLQJ�7KH� OLJKW� LQWHQVLW\� YDOXH� WR� VZLWFK� RQ� FDQ� EHVSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�OLVW�DQG�WKH�VZLWFKLQJVWDWH� FDQ� EH� UHDG� YLD� WKH� VWDWH� REMHFW� �WR� XVHZLWK�H�J��YLVXDOL]DWLRQ�VRIWZDUH��

− 'LPPLQJ�7KH� GLPPLQJ� SHULRG� FDQ� EH� VSHFLILHG� LQ� WKHSDUDPHWHU�OLVW�

− 6HW�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�7KH� OLJKW� LQWHQVLW\� FDQ� EH� VSHFLILHG� GLUHFWO\���������

− /LJKW�LQWHQVLW\�VWDWH��7KH�DFWXDO�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�FDQ�EH�UHDG�YLD�WKH�EXV�WR�XVH�ZLWK�H�J��YLVXDOL]DWLRQ�VRIWZDUH��

7KH� UHVSRQVH� WR� EXV� YROWDJH� HFXUUHQFH� FDQ� EHVSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�OLVW�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

1RWH�� 7KH� RUGHU� RI� WKH� HQWULHV�PD\� YDU\� IURP� WKHDERYH�GXH�WR�LQGLYLGXDO�FXVWRPL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�WDEOH�

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

� 2Q�RII 6ZLWFK�VWDWXV ��ELW &:8UHFHLYH

9LD�WKLV�REMHFW�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�RXWSXW�RI�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�GLPPLQJDFWXDWRU�LV�FRQWUROOHG�$GGLWLRQDOO\��WKH�DFWXDO�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�FDQ�EH�UHDG�YLD�WKHEXV�LQFOXGLQJ�FKDQJHV�RI�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�FDXVHG�E\�'LPPLQJ��RU��6HW�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\��RSHUDWLRQV�1RWH��2Q�VHWWLQJ�WKH�WUDQVPLVVLRQ��VHQGLQJ��IODJ��WKLV�REMHFWVHQGV�HDFK�WLPH�D�WHOHJUDP�LV�UHFHLYHG�DW�REMHFW�>�@��>�@��RU>�@�

� 'LPPLQJ %ULJKWHU�GDUNHU ��ELW &:78UHFHLYH

9LD�WKLV�REMHFW�GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�UHFHLYHG�

� 9DOXH 6HW�[�� ��E\WH &:78UHFHLYH

9LD�WKLV�REMHFW�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�YDOXHV�DUH�UHFHLYHG�

� 9DOXH 6WDWXV ��E\WH &578VHQG

9LD�WKLV�REMHFW�WKH�DFWXDO��OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\��VWDWH�RI�WKHVZLWFKLQJ�GLPPLQJ�DFWXDWRU�FDQ�EH�UHDG�DQG�VHQW�RQ�WKH�EXV�WR�XVH�ZLWK�H�J��YLVXDOL]DWLRQ�VRIWZDUH��

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� ��0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

3DUDPHWHUV

1RWH��7KH�VHTXHQFH�RI�WKH�SDUDPHWHUV�LQ�WKH�GH�VFULSWLRQ�LV�WKH�VDPH�DV�LQ�WKH�(76�VFUHHQ�VKRWV�

*HQHUDO�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

5HVSRQVH�WR�EXV�YROWDJHUHFRYHU\

VZLWFK�RIIVZLWFK�RQ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�RXWSXWV�UHVSRQVH�RQ�EXV�YROWDJHUHFRYHU\�

Page 47: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���$��'LPPHU�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/71

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

'LPPLQJ�UDQJH�IURP�����WR ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�UDQJH�WR�DGMXVW�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�

2Q�RII�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

6WDUWLQJ�YDOXH ILQDO�YDOXHEDFNJURXQG�EULJKWQHVV�������������������������������

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�WR�VZLWFK�RQ��ILQDO�YDOXH���2Q�VZLWFKLQJ�RII��WKH�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�YDOXH�LVSUHVHUYHG�DQG�UH�HVWDEOLVKHG�WKH�QH[W�WLPH�VZLWFKLQJ�RQ��EDFNJURXQG�EULJKWQHVV���7KH�(9*V�GHIDXOW�EDVH�OLJKWLQWHQVLW\�LV�HVWDEOLVKHG�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�RIIVHW�VHOHFWHG�

'LPPLQJ�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

6ZLWFK�RQ�SRVVLEOH�E\GLPPLQJ

\HVQR

7R�DOORZ�VZLWFKLQJ�RQ�E\�GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�ZKLOH�WKHOLJKWLQJ�LV�VZLWFKHG�RII�WKLV�SDUDPHWHU�PXVW�EH�VHW�WR��\HV��7KH��2Q�RII��REMHFW�>�@�LV�XSGDWHG�RQ�VZLWFKLQJ�RQDXWRPDWLFDOO\��

6ZLWFK�RII�SRVVLEOH�E\GLPPLQJ

QR\HV

7R�DOORZ�GLPPLQJ�WR�EHORZ�WKH�EFNJURXQG�LQWHQVLW\��L�H�VZLWFKLQJ�RII�E\�GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV��WKLV�SDUDPHWHU�PXVW�EHVHW�WR��\HV���7KH��2Q�RII��REMHFW�>�@�LV�XSGDWHG�RQ�VZLWFKLQJRII�DXWRPDWLFDOO\��

)DFWRU�IRU�GLPPLQJ�WLPH��������IRU������WK�RI�PD[LPXPEULJKWQHVV�

��

%DVH�IRU�GLPPLQJ�WLPH�IRU������WK�RI�PD[LPXPEULJKWQHVV�

EDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����PVEDVH�WLPH�����VHF�EDVH�WLPH����VHF�

7KH�GLPPLQJ�SHULRG�LV�JHQHUDWHG�E\�PXOWLSO\LQJ�WKHSDUDPHWHUV�WR�EDVH�DQG�IDFWRU��,W�LV�WKH�SHULRG�RI�WLPHUHTXLUHG�WR�FKDQJH�WKH�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�E\�������RI�WKHPD[LPXP�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�

9DOXH�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

'LPPLQJ�YDOXH DFFHSW�LPPHGLDWHO\RQO\�DFFHSW�RQ�21

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�ZKHWKHU�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�GLPPLQJDFWXDWRU�UHVSRQGV�WR�GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�UHFHLYHG�YLD�WKH�EXVZKLOH�WKH�OLJKWLQJ�LV�VZLWFKHG�RII���HVWDEOLVK�LPPHGLDWHO\����RUZKHWKHU�WKHVH�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�SUHVHUYHG�WR�H[HFXWH�RQ�WKHQH[W��RQ��WHOHJUDP�

$GMXVW�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\ MXPSGLPPLQJ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�ZKHWKHU�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�GLPPLQJDFWXDWRU�LV�WR�XVH�WKH�VSHFLILHG�GLPPLQJ�SHULRG�WR�HVWDEOLVKUHFHLYHG�OLJKW�LQWHQVLW\�YDOXHV�RU�ZKHWKHU�WKHVH�DUH�WR�EHHVWDEOLVKHG�LPPHGLDWHO\�

Page 48: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��0'HWHFW����$��

3/196 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� 3K\V��6HQVRUV3URGXFW�W\SH� 0RYHPHQW0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH� 0RYHPHQW�'HWHFWRU�83����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$3��

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

7KH�PRYHPHQW�GHWHFWRUV�GHWHFWLRQ�DUHD�LV�GLYLGHGLQWR�WZR� LQGHSHQGHQW����GHJUHH�VHFWLRQV� �OHIW�DQGULJKW�� WR� GHWHFWLQJ� PRYHPHQW�� 2Q� SLFNLQJ� XSPRYHPHQW�REMHFW�>�@�VHQGV�DQ��RQ��RU��RII��WHOHJUDPDV� VSHFLILHG� LQ� WKH� SDUDPHWHU� OLVW� ��,QSXW�� 6HQGFRQGLWLRQ�RQ�PRYHPHQW�QR�PRYHPHQW����:KHQ�VHWWR� �WRJJOH��� WHOHJUDPV� DUH� VHQW� ��RQ�� RU� �RII��DSSURSULDWH� WR� FKDQJH� WKH� DFWXDO� VLJQDO� VWDWH�� 7KHVLJQDOOLQJ� SHULRG� FDQ� EH� UH�VWDUWHG�� ,�H�� RQ� SLFNLQJXS� PRYHPHQW� GXULQJ� WKH� VLJQDOOLQJ� SHULRG� �DVVSHFLILHG� RQ� WKH� GHYLFH��� WKLV� SHULRG� LV� UH�VWDUWHG�$Q� �RII�� WHOHJUDP� LV� VHQW� RQFH� WKLV� SHULRG� SDVVHVZLWK�QR�IXUWKHU�PRYHPHQW�GHWHFWHG�

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

� ,QSXW RQ�RII�WRJJOH ��ELW &:78VHQG

7KLV�VHQGLQJ�REMHFW�VHQGV��RQ��RU��RII��WHOHJUDPV�DV�VHW�LQ�WKHSDUDPHWHU�OLVW��:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH���WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW���RQ�RU��RII���DSSURSULDWH�WR�FKDQJH�WKH�DFWXDO�VLJQDO�VWDWH�$GGLWLRQDOO\��WKH�DFWXDO�VLJQDO�VWDWH�LV�VHQW�DW�WKH�VSHFLILHGIUHTXHQF\�ZKHQ�VHW�WR��F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��1RWH��&RQVLGHU�EXV�WUDIILF�ZKHQ�VHWWLQJ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQGIUHTXHQF\�

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� ��0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

3DUDPHWHUV

,QSXW�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

6HQGLQJ�FRQGLWLRQ�RQPRYHPHQW���QR�PRYHPHQW

RQ���QR�FKDQJHRII���QR�FKDQJHWRJJOH���QR�FKDQJHQR�FKDQJH���RQQR�FKDQJH���RIIQR�FKDQJH���WRJJOHRQ���RIIRII���RQWRJJOH���WRJJOHQR�FKDQJH���QR�FKDQJH

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�WKH�WHOHJUDP�WR�EH�VHQW�RQ�GHWHFWLQJPRYHPHQW�DQG�ZKHQ�QRW�GHWHFWLQJ�DQ\�PRYHPHQW�

&\FOLF�6HQGLQJ�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

6HQGLQJ�FULWHULRQ QR�F\FOLF�VHQGF\FOLF�RQ�RQO\F\FOLF�RII�RQO\F\FOLF�RQ�DQG�RII

7KH�VWDWH�RI�WKH�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW�FDQ�DOVR�EH�VHQWF\FOLFDOO\��7KH�F\FOH�SHULRG�LV�JHQHUDWHG�E\�PXOWLSO\LQJ�WKHWZR�SDUDPHWHUV��&\FOLF�VHQG�EDVH��DQG��&\FOLF�VHQG�IDFWRU�����������1RWH��&RQVLGHU�EXV�WUDIILF�ZKHQ�VHWWLQJ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQGIUHTXHQF\�

&\FOLF�VHQG�IDFWRU�������� ��

&\FOLF�VHQG�EDVH WLPHU�EDVH�����PVWLPHU�EDVH�����PVWLPHU�EDVH���VHFWLPHU�EDVH�����VHFWLPHU�EDVH�����VHFWLPHU�EDVH�����VHFWLPHU�EDVH����VHFWLPHU�EDVH����VHFWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH���PLQWLPHU�EDVH����PLQWLPHU�EDVH����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����K

7KH�F\FOH�SHULRG�LV�JHQHUDWHG�E\�PXOWLSO\LQJ�WKH�WZRSDUDPHWHUV��&\FOLF�VHQG�EDVH��DQG��&\FOLF�VHQG�IDFWRU�����������1RWH�&RQVLGHU�EXV�WUDIILF�ZKHQ�VHWWLQJ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQGIUHTXHQF\�

Page 49: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���&2�,5�'HFR��)����

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/127

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� ,QIUDUHG3URGXFW�W\SH� ,5�'HFRGHU�1���0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH�� ,5�'HFRGHU2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

,Q� DQ� LQIUDUHG� V\VWHP� ,5� VLJQDOV� DUH� VHQW� E\� ,5WUDQVPLWWHUV�DQG� UHPRWH�FRQWUROV� RQ�RSHUDWLQJ� WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ� SXVK� � EXWWRQV� RU� URFNHU� VZLWFKHV�7KH�,5�UHFHLYHU�SLFNV�XS�WKH�,5�VLJQDOV�DQG�IRUZDUGVWKHP� WR� WKH� WR� WKH� ,5� GHFRGHU�ZKHUH� WKH� VLJQDOVDUH� FRQYHUWHG� WR� WHOHJUDPV� DQG� VHQW� RQ� WKHLQVWDEXV�(,%�8QOLNH� LWV� SUHGHFHVVRU� �:*�� �����$%��� �ZKLFKUHTXLUHG� WKH� 676� 6LHPHQV� 7RRO� 6RIWZDUH�� WKH� ,5GHFRGHU� �:*�� �����$%��� GRHV� QRW� UHTXLUH� DQ\DGGLWLRQDO� SURJUDPPLQJ� VRIWZDUH�� 7KH� ,5� GHFRGHUFDQ�EH�FRQILJXUHG�OLNH�DQ\�RWKHU�GHYLFH�ZLWK�DQ�(76YHUVLRQ� ����� RU� KLJKHU�� ,W� QRZ� LV� DOVR� SRVVLEOH� WRXVH�WKH�GHFRGHU�WR�GLIIHUHQW�WDVNV��H�J��GLPPLQJ�EOLQGV�FRQWURO��DW�WKH�VDPH�WLPH�7KH�,5�GHFRGHU�FDQ�PDQDJH�XS�WR����FRQILJXUDWLRQV�,5� FKDQQHOV��� :LWK� D� URWDU\� VZLWFK� DQG� D� VOLGHVZLWFK� WKH� ,5� FKDQQHO� FDQ� EH� VSHFLILHG�� D� ,5WUDQVPLWWRU�RU�UHPRWH�FRQWURO�

$Q� ,5� FKDQQHO� FDQ� EH� HPSOR\HG� WR� WKH� IROORZLQJWDVNV�− 6ZLWFKLQJ

− 6ZLWFKLQJ�DQG�GLPPLQJ

− 6ZLWFKLQJ�DQG�YDOXH�VHWWLQJ

− %OLQGV�FRQWURO

− 9DOXH�VHWWLQJ

− 6FHQH�FRQWURO

7DVNV� DUH� DVVLJQHG� ZKHQ� FRQILJXULQJ� WKH� ,5GHFRGHU� ZLWK� WKH� (76��� )XUWKHUPRUH�� WKH� JURXSDGGUHVHV� PXVW� EH� DVVLJQHG� WR� VHQGLQJ� WKHWHOHJUDPV�RQ�WKH�EXV�

7KH� ,5� GHFRGHU� SURYLGHV� ��� FRPPXQLFDWLRQREMHFWV��,�H���XS�WR����GLIIHUHQW�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�FDQEH�PDQDJHG�� (DFK� FRPPXQLFDWLRQ� REMHFW� UHTXLUHV��VHWWLQJV�

− *URXS�DGGUHVV �REMHFW�DGGUHVV�ZLQGRZ�

− 2EMHFW�VL]H��W\SH� �SDUDPHWHUV�

− 7DVN �SDUDPHWHUV�

− ,5�FKDQQHO �SDUDPHWHUV�

$FFRUGLQJ� WR� WKH� FKRVHQ� WDVN� �VZLWFKLQJ�GLPPLQJ�EOLQGV�VFHQHV�� WKH� ,5� GHFRGHU� GLVWLQJXLVKHVEHWZHHQ� VKRUW� ��� ���� VHF��� DQG� ORQJ� VZLWFKRSHUDWLRQV�DW�WKH�WUDQVPLWWHU��6KRUW�DQG�ORQJ�VZLWFKRSHUDWLRQV� WKHQ� FDQ� EH� XVHG� WR� DGGUHVV� GLIIHUHQWREMHFWV�� +RZHYHU�� WKLV� XVHV� XS� WZR� FRQILJXUDWLRQHQWULHV�

)ROORZ�WKH�EHORZ�LQVWUXFWLRQV�ZKHQ�FRQILJXULQJ�WKH,5�GHFRGHU�− 6HOHFW�WKH�FKDQQHO�WKDW�LV�WR�EH�XVHG�WR�VHQGLQJZLWK�WKH�,5�WUDQVPLWWHUV�FRGLQJ�VZLWFK�

− $GG�WKH�GHVLUHG�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�LQ�WKH�,5�GHFRGHUVSDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�E\�VSHFLI\LQJ� WKH�QXPEHU�RIWKH� ,5� FKDQQHO� �������� WKH� WDVN�VZLWFKLQJ�GLPPLQJ�EOLQGV�VFHQHV��� DQG� WKHREMHFW�W\SH����ELW����ELW����E\WH��

− 'HILQH�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV�ZLWK�WKH�(76

− $VVLJQ� JURXS� DGGUHVVHV� WR� WKH� UHVSHFWLYHREMHFWV�RI�ERWK�WKH�,5�GHFRGHU�DQG�WKH�DFWXDWRUVDQG�WKHUHE\�GHILQH�WKH�REMHFW�W\SH��H�J����ELW��

$�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�FRQVLVWV�RI�− 1XPEHU�RI� ,5�FKDQQHOV��+HUH�� WKH�QXPEHU�RI� ,5FKDQQHOV����������FDQ�EH�VHOHFWHG��&RQILJXUDWLRQVWKDW� LV� QRW� EH� XVHG� PXVW� EH� GLVDEOHG�� 7KHFRQILJXUDWLRQV� VKRXOG� EH� XVHG� LQ� DVFHQGLQJRUGHU�

− 7DVN�� 7KLV� HQWU\� GHILQHV� WKH� RSHUDWLQJ�PRGH� WRUHVSRQVLQJ� WR� D� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ�� +HUH�� D� ���FRUUHVSRQGV� WR� WKH� URFNHUV� XSSHU� VZLWFKLQJSRLQW� �WKH� OHIW� NH\�RQ� WKH� UHPRWH�FRQWURO�� DQG�D���� WKH� URFNHUV� ORZHU� VZLWFKLQJ� SRLQW� �WKH� ULJKWNH\�RQ�WKH�UHPRWH�FRQWURO��

− 2EMHFW� W\SH�� 7KH� REMHFW� W\SH� PXVW� EH� FKRVHQDFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�VHOHFWHG�PRGH��7KH�W\SH�FDQQRWEH�HQWHUHG�RQFH�D�JURXS�DGGUHVV�LV�DVVLJQHG�WRWKH�FRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW��7KH�,5�GHFRGHU�XVHV��ELW�����ELW���RU���E\WH�W\SHV�

Page 50: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���&2�,5�'HFR��)����

3/128 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

1RWH�� 7KH� RUGHU� RI� WKH� HQWULHV�PD\� YDU\� IURP� WKHDERYH�GXH�WR�LQGLYLGXDO�FXVWRPL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�WDEOH�

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78WUDQVPLW

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�� ��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

Page 51: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���&2�,5�'HFR��)����

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/129

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ�����

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJV

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ����

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ��

&RQILJXUDWLRQ��

��ELW��ELW��E\WH

&:78UHFHLYH

7KH�WDVNV�WR�WKLV�FRQILJXUDWLRQ�DQG�WKH�W\SH�RI�WKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW�DUH�VSHFLILHG�LQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� ��0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

3DUDPHWHUV

&RQILJXUDWLRQ���

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

,5�FKDQQHO�QR� GLVDEOHG���:DOO�PRXQWHG�WUDQVPLWWHU �+DQG�KHOG�WUDQVPLWWHU� ��������:DOO�PRXQWHG�WUDQVPLWWHU )+DQG�KHOG�WUDQVPLWWHU� ��

+HUH��WKH�QXPEHU�RI�,5�FKDQQHOV����������FDQ�EH�VHOHFWHG�&RQILJXUDWLRQV�WKDW�LV�QRW�EH�XVHG�PXVW�EH�GLVDEOHG��7KHFRQILJXUDWLRQV�VKRXOG�EH�XVHG�LQ�DVFHQGLQJ�RUGHU�

Page 52: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���&2�,5�'HFR��)����

3/130 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

)XQFWLRQ 6ZLWFKLQJ,��RQ����RII�����ELW'LPPLQJ�RQ�RII,��RQ����RII�����ELW'LPPLQJ,��EULJKWHU����GDUNHU�����ELW6HW�YDOXH,����������������E\WH6HW�YDOXH,����������������E\WH6HW�YDOXH,�����������������E\WH6HW�YDOXH,�����������������E\WH6HW�YDOXH,������������������E\WH6HW�YDOXH,������������������E\WH0RYH�EOLQGV,��XS����GRZQ�����ELW$GMXVW�ORXYUHV,��XS����GRZQ�����ELW5HFDOO�VFHQH,��6]��������6]���������ELW3URJUDP�VFHQH,��6]��������6]��������ELW6ZLWFKLQJ�RYHU,��DQG����RQ�RII����ELW'LPPLQJ�RQ�RII�RYHU,��DQG����RQ�RII�����ELW'LPPLQJ�RYHU,��DQG����EULJKWHU�GDUNHU�����ELW

7KLV�HQWU\�GHILQHV�WKH�RSHUDWLQJ�PRGH�WR�UHVSRQVLQJ�WR�DVZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ��+HUH��D�����FRUUHVSRQGV�WR�WKH�URFNHUVXSSHU�VZLWFKLQJ�SRLQW��WKH�OHIW�NH\�RQ�WKH�UHPRWH�FRQWURO��DQGD�����WKH�URFNHUV�ORZHU�VZLWFKLQJ�SRLQW��WKH�ULJKW�NH\�RQ�WKHUHPRWH�FRQWURO�

2EMHFW�W\SH�PDWFK�DERYH�IXQFWLRQ�

��ELW���VZLWFKLQJ�RQ�RII����EOLQGV��VFHQH��ELW���GLPPLQJ�EULJKWHU����GDUNHU��E\WH���VHW�YDOXH

7KH�REMHFW�W\SH�PXVW�EH�FKRVHQ�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�PRGHVHOHFWHG��7KH�W\SH�FDQQRW�EH�HQWHUHG�RQFH�D�JURXS�DGGUHVVLV�DVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�FRUUHVSRQGLQJ�REMHFW��7KH�,5�GHFRGHU�XVHV��ELW�����ELW���RU���E\WH�W\SHV�

7KH�SDUDPHWHUV�RI�WKH�FRQILJXUDWLRQV���WR����FDQEH�VHW�DFFRUGLQJO\�

6FHQH�SURJUDPPLQJ�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

(QWHU�SURJUDPPLQJ�PRGHDIWHU

��VHFRQGV��VHFRQGV���VHFRQGV���VHFRQGV���VHFRQGV

7R�DYRLG�HQWHULQJ�WKH�SURJUDPPLQJ�PRGH�DFFLGHQWDOO\��WKLVSDUDPHWHU�DOORZV�\RX�WR�DGMXVW�WKH�SHULRG�WR�JHQHUDWLQJ�ORQJDQG�VKRUW�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV��2SHUDWLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�VZLWFKORQJHU�WKDQ�WKH�VHOHFWHG�SHULRG�SURGXFHV�D�ORQJ�VZLWFKRSHUDWLRQ�WR�HQWHULQJ�WKH�SURJUDPPLQJ�PRGH�

0RQLWRULQJ�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

/RQJ�SXVK�EXWWRQ�DFWLRQ LQDFWLYHDFWLYH

2Q�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�D�VHULHV�RI�,5�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQWZLWK�D�FHUWDLQ�IUHTXHQF\��F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ���:KHQ�IDLOLQJ�WRUHFHLYH�RQH�RU�PRUH�RI�WKHVH�,5�WHOHJUDPV�WKH�DFWXDWRUUHVSRQGV�DV�LI�UHFHLYLQJ�D�VWRS�VLJQDO�([DPSOH��$Q�,5�FKDQQHO�LV�VHW�WR��GLPPLQJ�RYHU��PRGH��1RZ�D�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�LV�WR�EH�XVHG�WR�GLPPLQJ��,I�WKHWUDQVPLVVLRQ�LV�LQWHUUXSWHG�HYHQ�EULHIO\��H�J��VRPHERG\PRYHV�WKURXJK�WKH�URRP���WKH�,5�GHFRGHU�ZRXOG�VWRSVHQGLQJ�GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV��DQG�VHQG�DQ��RYHU��WHOHJUDPZKHQ�UHFHLYLQJ�WKH�QH[W�,5�WHOHJUDP�:KHQ�VHW�WR��HQDEOHG���WKLV�SDUDPHWHU�DOORZV�\RX�WR�IRUFH�WKH,5�GHFRGHU�WR�ZDLW�WR�D�PLVVLQJ�WHOHJUDP�D�FHUWDLQ�SHULRG�RIWLPH��DW�OHDVW�WZR�VHQGLQJ�SHULRGV��EHIRUH�VWRSSLQJ�WRIRUZDUG�WKH�UHFHLYHG�VLJQDOV�RQ�WKH�EXV��,W�LJQRUHV�D�PLVVLQJWHOHJUDP�DQG�FRQWLQXHV�IRUZDUGLQJ�WKH�VLJQDOV�UHFHLYHG�RQWKH�EXV�

&RQILJXUDWLRQ�H[DPSOHV

6ZLWFKLQJ�,Q� WKH� VZLWFKLQJ� FRQILJXUDWLRQ�RSHUDWLQJ� WKH�XSSHUVZLWFKLQJ� SRLQW� RI� WKH� ,5� WUDQVPLWWHU� SURGXFHV� DQ�RQ�� WHOHJUDP� DQG� RSHUDWLQJ� WKH� ORZHU� VZLWFKLQJSRLQW�SURGXFHV�DQ��RII��WHOHJUDP��2SHUDWLQJ�WKH�OHIWNH\� RQ� WKH� ,5� UHPRWH� FRQWUROOHU� SURGXFHV� DQ� �RQ�WHOHJUDP� DQG� RSHUDWLQJ� WKH� ULJKW� NH\� SURGXFHV� DQ�RII�� WHOHJUDP�� ,Q� WKLV� FRQILJXUDWLRQ� WKH� DSSOLFDWLRQSURJUDP� GRHV� QRW� GLVWLQJXLVK� EHWZHHQ� VKRUW� DQGORQJ� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQV�� 7KLV� FRQILJXUDWLRQ� LV� XVHGPRVWO\� WR� VZLWFKLQJ� ELQDU\� RXWSXWV�� ,W� DOVR� FDQ� EHXVHG�WR�UHFDOOLQJ�VFHQHV�ZKHQ�XVHG�LQ�FRPELQDWLRQZLWK�D�VFHQH�PRGXOH��VHH��VFHQH�FRQWURO��

Page 53: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���&2�,5�'HFR��)����

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/131

6ZLWFKLQJ�RYHU��WRJJOH��2Q� RSHUDWLQJ� HLWKHU� WKH� VZLWFKLQJ� SRLQW� RI� WKHURFNHU��WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW���RQ��RU��RII���DSSURSULDWHWR� FKDQJH� WKH� DFWXDO� VZLWFKLQJ� VWDWH�� ,�H�� WKH� ILUVWVZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ� SURGXFHV� DQ� �RQ�� WHOHJUDP�� DVHFRQG� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ� SURGXFHV� DQ� �RII�WHOHJUDP��DQG�VR�RQ��$V�QR�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�DYDLODEOHWR� VZLWFKLQJ� RYHU�� WKH� ,5� GHFRGHU� VWRUHV� WKHSUHYLRXV� VZLWFKLQJ� VWDWH�� ZKHQ� WKH� URFNHU� LVRSHUDWHG�DJDLQ��WKLV�VWDWH�LV�LQYHUWHG�DQG�WKHQ�VHQWRQ�WKH�EXV��1RWH��7R�PDNH�WKH��RYHU��PRGH�FRQILJXUDWLRQV���WR�� VKRXOG�EH�XVHG��2WKHUZLVH�� WKH� ,5� WUDQVPLWWHUVURFNHU� PLJKW� UHTXLUH� WZR� RSHUDWLRQV� LQ� RUGHU� WRSURGXFH�DQ�DSSURSULDWH�EXV�WHOHJUDP�

'LPPLQJ�,Q� WKH� GLPPLQJ� FRQILJXUDWLRQ� WKH� DSSOLFDWLRQSURJUDP� GLVWLQJXLVKHV� EHWZHHQ� ORQJ� DQG� VKRUWVZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV��6KRUW�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV�DGGUHVVWKH�VZLWFK�REMHFW� �RQ�RII��RI� WKH�GLPPLQJ� DFWXDWRUDQG� ORQJ� RSHUDWLRQV� DGGUHVV� WKH� GLPPLQJDFWXDWRUV�� 7KH� GLIIHUHQFH� EHWZHHQ� WKH� PRGHV�VZLWFKLQJ�� DQG� �GLPPLQJ� RQ�RII�� VHQGV� �RQ�� DQG�RII�� WHOHJUDPV� RQ� D� VKRUW� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ� RQO\�:KHQ� NHHSLQJ� WKH� URFNHU� RU� NH\� SUHVVHG�� ����EULJKWHQ�� RU� ����� GDUNHQ�� WHOHJUDPV� DUH� VHQWSHULRGLFDOO\� HYHU\� ���� VHFRQGV� XQWLO� UHOHDVLQJ� WKHURFNHU� RU� NH\�� 7KH� GLPPLQJ� VWHSV� ����� � ����FDQQRW� EH� FKDQJHG�� $Q� ,5� GHFRGHU� FDQQRW� XVH� D�GLP�E\�VWRS�WHOHJUDP��PRGH�1RWH��%HDU� LQ�PLQG�WKDW���FRQILJXUDWLRQ�HQWULHV�DUHUHTXLUHG�ZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�RI�DQ�,5�WUDQVPLWWHULQ� �GLPPLQJ�� FRQILJXUDWLRQ�� 2QH� WR� KDQGOLQJ� WKHVZLWFKLQJ� DQG� RQH� WR� WKH� GLPPLQJ� �EULJKWHQ�GDUNHQ���%RWK�FRQILJXUDWLRQV�PXVW�EH�DVVLJQHG�WKHVDPH�,5�FKDQQHO�

'LP�E\�YDOXH�VHWWLQJ�7KH��VHW�YDOXH��FRQILJXUDWLRQ�SURYLGHV�YDULRXV�IL[HGSUHVHWV� WR� FKRRVH� IURP� LQ� WKH� SDUDPHWHU�ZLQGRZ�2SHUDWLQJ�PRGH��1RWH�� :KHQ� XVLQJ� RQO\� WKH� YDOXH� REMHFW� RI� DGLPPLQJ�DFWXDWRU��VZLWFKLQJ�WKH�OLJKWLQJ�RQ�DQG�RIIE\�GLPPLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�PXVW�EH�DOORZHG�E\�VHWWLQJWKH� UHVSHFWLYH� SDUDPHWHUV� DFFRUGLQJO\� ZKHQSURJUDPPLQJ�WKH�GLPPLQJ�DFWXDWRU�

6ZLWFKLQJ�DQG�GLPPLQJ�ZLWK��RYHU��:KHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�PRGH��GLPPLQJ��RYHU��RU��GLPPLQJRQ�RII�RYHU�� WKH� DSSOLFDWLRQ� SURJUDP�� GLVWLQJXLVKHVEHWZHHQ�VKRUW�DQG�ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV��7R�VKRUWVZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQV� VHH� WKH� �VZLWFKLQJ� RYHU�FRQILJXUDWLRQ��2Q� ORQJ� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQV� GLPPLQJWHOHJUDPV� DUH� VHQW� RQ� WKH� EXV� �EULJKWHQ�GDUNHQ��:KHQ� UHOHDVLQJ� WKH� URFNHU� DQG� RSHUDWLQJ� LW� RQFHPRUH� WKH� GLPPLQJ� HIIHFW� LV� LQYHUWHG�� :KHQ� WKHGLPPLQJ� DFWXDWRUV� PD[LPXP� RU� PLQLPXPGLPPLQJ� YDOXH� LV� UHDFKHG�� IXUWKHU� GLPPLQJWHOHJUDPV�DUH�LJQRUHG��:KHQ�NHHSLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�RUNH\� SUHVVHG�� ����� EULJKWHQ�� RU� ����� GDUNHQ�WHOHJUDPV� DUH� VHQW� SHULRGLFDOO\� HYHU\� ���� VHFRQGVXQWLO� UHOHDVLQJ� WKH� URFNHU� RU� NH\�� 7KH� GLPPLQJVWHSV������ ������FDQQRW�EH�FKDQJHG�1RWH��%HDU� LQ�PLQG�WKDW���FRQILJXUDWLRQ�HQWULHV�DUHUHTXLUHG�ZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�RI�DQ�,5�WUDQVPLWWHULQ� �GLPPLQJ�� FRQILJXUDWLRQ�� 2QH� WR� KDQGOLQJ� WKHVZLWFKLQJ� DQG� RQH� WR� WKH� GLPPLQJ� �EULJKWHQ�GDUNHQ���%RWK�FRQILJXUDWLRQV�PXVW�EH�DVVLJQHG�WKHVDPH�,5�FKDQQHO�

Page 54: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���&2�,5�'HFR��)����

3/132 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

%OLQGV�FRQWURO�7ZR� FRQILJXUDWLRQV� DUH� SURYLGHG� WR� FRQWUROOLQJEOLQGV� DFWXDWRUV�� 7KH� DSSOLFDWLRQ� SURJUDPGLVWLQJXLVKHV� EHWZHHQ� ORQJ� DQG� VKRUW� VZLWFKRSHUDWLRQV��2Q�D�VKRUW�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQ�D�WHOHJUDPWR�DGMXVWLQJ�WKH� ORXYUHV� LV�VHQW� ��2Q�D� ORQJ�VZLWFKRSHUDWLRQ� �UDLVH�� DQG� �ORZHU�� WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW� WRPRYLQJ�WKH�EOLQGV�1RWH��%HDU� LQ�PLQG�WKDW���FRQILJXUDWLRQ�HQWULHV�DUHUHTXLUHG�ZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�RI�DQ�,5�WUDQVPLWWHULQ��EOLQGV�FRQWURO��FRQILJXUDWLRQ��2QH�WR�KDQGOLQJ�WKHEOLQGV�PRYHPHQW�DQG�RQH�WR�DGMXVWLQJ�WKH�ORXYUHV�%RWK�FRQILJXUDWLRQV�PXVW�EH�DVVLJQHG�WKH�VDPH�,5FKDQQHO�

6FHQH�FRQWURO�7KH� ,5� GHFRGHU� �:*�� �����$%��� RQO\� VXSSRUWVWKH�DSSOLFDWLRQ�SURJUDPV�����&��6FHQ0RG��������DQG� ���� &�� 6FHQ0RG� �������� 7KH� WHOHJUDPV� WRUHFDOOLQJ� WKH� VFHQHV� DUH� LGHQWLFDO� LQ� DOO� DSSOLFDWLRQSURJUDPV�� KRZHYHU�� VFHQHV� DUH� VWRUHG� GLIIHUHQWO\�:KHQ� DGGLQJ� DQ� ,5� GHFRGHU� WR� DQ� H[LVWLQJ� (,%FRQILJXUH��ZKLFK�ZDV�PDGH�HPSOR\LQJ�RQH� RI� WKHDSSOLFDWLRQ� SURJUDPV� ������� WR� �������� VFHQHVFDQ� RQO\� EH� UHFDOOHG� ZLWK� WKH� ,5� GHFRGHU� EXW� QRWSURJUDPPHG�� ,Q� RUGHU� WR� UHFDOO� VFHQHV�� WKH� ,5GHFRGHU� PXVW� EH� VHW� WR� WKH� �VZLWFKLQJ�FRQILJXUDWLRQ��6KRUW� VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV� DUH� XVHG� WRUHFDOOLQJ�VFHQHV��ORQJ�VZLWFK�RSHUDWLRQV�DUH�XVHG�WRSURJUDPPLQJ� VFHQHV�� :KLOH� WKH� WLPH� SHULRG� WRJHQHUDWLQJ� D� ORQJ� VZLWFK� RSHUDWLRQ� FDQQRW� EHFKDQJHG� WR� WKH� GLPPLQJ� FRQILJXUDWLRQ�� LW� FDQ� EHDGMXVWHG�WR�SURJUDPPLQJ�VFHQHV�1RWH��%HDU� LQ�PLQG�WKDW���FRQILJXUDWLRQ�HQWULHV�DUHUHTXLUHG�ZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�RI�DQ�,5�WUDQVPLWWHULQ��VFHQH�FRQWURO��FRQILJXUDWLRQ��2QH�WR�UHFDOOLQJ�WKHVFHQHV� DQG� RQH� WR� VWRULQJ� WKHP�� %RWKFRQILJXUDWLRQV� PXVW� EH� DVVLJQHG� WKH� VDPH� ,5FKDQQHO��7KH�HQWU\�WR�VWRULQJ�VFHQHV�FDQ�EH�LJQRUHGZKHQ�XVLQJ�WKH�URFNHU�RQO\�WR�UHFDOO�VFHQHV�

Page 55: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��%LQ&\FO�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/91

'HYLFHV�(PSOR\LQJ�WKH�3URJUDP

3URGXFW�IDPLO\� ,QSXW3URGXFW�W\SH� %LQDU\�,QSXW���IROG0DQXIDFWXUHU� 6LHPHQV

1DPH� 3XVK�%XWWRQ�,QWHUIDFH�83����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� %LQDU\�,QSXW�1����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� %LQDU\�,QSXW�*(����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� %LQDU\�,QSXW�1����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� %LQDU\�,QSXW�*(����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

1DPH� %LQDU\�,QSXW�*(����2UGHU�QR�� �:*�������$%��

$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVFULSWLRQ

7KLV� DSSOLFDWLRQ� SURJUDP� DOORZV� \RX� WR� XVHFRQYHQWLRQDO� VLJQDOOLQJ�GHYLFHV�� H�J�� SXVK� EXWWRQV�VZLWFKHV�� YROW� IUHH� FRQWDFWV�� ���� 9� FRQWDFWV� DQGVPDOO� YROWDJH� FRQWDFWV� YLD� D� SXVK� EXWWRQ� LQWHUIDFH83�����RU�D�ELQDU\� LQSXW���IROG�IRU�VZLWFKLQJ�WDVNV�RQ�RII�WRJJOH��

%ORFN�GLDJUDP�RI�DQ�LQSXW�FKDQQHO

Input

t

RAM-memory unit

bus-telegrams

edgeevalution communication

object

send condition onchange at input

send condition:cyclic sending

(DFK� RI� WKH� IRXU� LQSXWV� FDQ� EH� DVVLJQHG� DQ� HGJHHYDOXDWLRQ�LQGHSHQGHQWO\�WR�SURGXFLQJ��RQ��DQG��RII�WHOHJUDPV�RQ�FKDQJH�RI�WKH�VLJQDO�VWDWH�IURP�����WR���� DQG� IURP� ���� WR� ����� $� VHQGLQJ� ILOWHU� UXOHVZKHWKHU�ERWK�VZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�WKHEXV�RU�MXVW��RQ��RU��RII��$GGLWLRQDOO\��WHOHJUDPV�FDQ�EH�VHQW�F\FOLFDOO\�ZLWK�DIUHTXHQF\� VSHFLILHG� LQ� WKH� SDUDPHWHU� OLVW�)XUWKHUPRUH�� WKH�DFWXDO�VLJQDO�VWDWHV�RI� WKH� LQSXWVDUH� UHDG� RQ� EXV� YROWDJH� UHVWRUDWLRQ� DQG� RQ

LQLWLDOL]LQJ� WKH� ELQDU\� LQSXW� DQG� VHQW� RQ� WKH� EXVGLUHFWO\�ZKHQ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU��6HQG�FXUUHQW�VWDWH�RQEXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ��LV�VHW�WR��HQDEOHG��

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ�2EMHFWV

1RWH�� 7KH�RUGHU� RI� WKH�HQWULHV�PD\� YDU\� IURP� WKHDERYH�GXH�WR�LQGLYLGXDO�FXVWRPL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�WDEOH�

2EM )XQFWLRQ 2EMHFW�QDPH 7\SH )ODJ

� ,QSXW�$ 2Q�RII�WRJJOH ��ELW &:78VHQGLQJ

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RI�LQSXW�$��7KH�SDUDPHWHU��(GJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��UXOHVZKLFK�VLJQDO�VWDWH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQG�ZKLFKRQH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV��:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH���DOOJURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDO�VZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUHDVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVW�DOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]LQJWKH�SXVK�EXWWRQ�VHQVRU�

� ,QSXW�% 2Q�RII�WRJJOH ��ELW &:78VHQGLQJ

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RI�LQSXW�%��7KH�SDUDPHWHU��(GJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��UXOHVZKLFK�VLJQDO�VWDWH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQG�ZKLFKRQH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV��:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH����DOOJURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDO�VZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUHDVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVW�DOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]LQJWKH�SXVK�EXWWRQ�VHQVRU�

� ,QSXW�& 2Q�RII�WRJJOH ��ELW &:78VHQGLQJ

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RI�LQSXW�&��7KH�SDUDPHWHU��(GJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��UXOHVZKLFK�VLJQDO�VWDWH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQG�ZKLFKRQH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV��:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH����DOOJURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDO�VZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUHDVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVW�DOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]LQJWKH�SXVK�EXWWRQ�VHQVRU

� ,QSXW�' 2Q�RII�WRJJOH ��ELW &:78VHQGLQJ

7KLV�REMHFW�KROGV�WKH�JURXS�DGGUHVV�WR�VHQGLQJ�WKH�VZLWFKLQJWHOHJUDPV�RI�LQSXW�'��7KH�SDUDPHWHU��(GJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��UXOHVZKLFK�VLJQDO�VWDWH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RQ��WHOHJUDPV�DQG�ZKLFKRQH�ZLOO�SURGXFH�WKH��RII��WHOHJUDPV��:KHQ�VHW�WR��WRJJOH����DOOJURXS�DGGUHVVHV�WR�FHQWUDO�VZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�WKDW�ZHUHDVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�DFWXDWRU�PXVW�DOVR�EH�DGGHG�WR�V\QFKURQL]LQJWKH�SXVK�EXWWRQ�VHQVRU�

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�JURXS�DGGUHVVHV� ��0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�DVVLJQPHQWV� ��

Page 56: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��%LQ&\FO�������

3/92 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

3DUDPHWHUV

*HQHUDO�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

'HERXQFH�WLPH ���PLOOLVHFRQGV���PLOOLVHFRQGV���PLOOLVHFRQGV����PLOOLVHFRQGV

$�EULHI�ERXQFLQJ�RFFXUV�HDFK�WLPH�D�SXVK�EXWWRQ�LV�RSHUDWHG�7KH�FRQWDFW�RSHQV�DQG�FORVHV�D�FRXSOH�RI�WLPHV�EHIRUHVHWWOLQJ�LQ�WKH�FORVHG�SRVLWLRQ��7KH�ERXQFLQJ�WLPH�GHSHQGVRQ�WKH�SXVK�EXWWRQ�XVHG��7R�DYRLG�WKH�VHQGLQJ�RI�PXOWLSOHVZLWFKLQJ�WHOHJUDPV�DV�D�UHVSRQVH�WR�WKH�PXOWLSOH�VZLWFKRSHUDWLRQV�FDXVHG�E\�UHDGLQJ�WKH�LQSXW�GXULQJ�WKH�ERXQFLQJWLPH��WKH�GHERXQFH�WLPH�VKRXOG�EH�VHOHFWHG�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKHSXVK�EXWWRQV�FKDUDFWHULVWLF��2Q�UHDGLQJ�D�FKDQJH�RI�LQSXWVWDWH�WKH�DSSOLFDWLRQ�SURJUDP�ZDLWV�WR�WKH�VSHFLILHG�SHULRG�RIWLPH�EHIRUH�SURFHVVLQJ�WKH�DFWXDO�VWDWH�

6HQG�FXUUHQW�YDOXH�RQ�EXVYROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ��DVUXOHG�E\�HGJH�HYDOXDWLRQ�

<HV1R

2Q�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�DQG�RQ�LQLWLDOL]LQJ�WKH�ELQDU\�LQSXWWKH�VLJQDO�VWDWHV�RI�WKH�LQSXWV�DUH�UHDG�DV�UXOHG�E\�WKH��HGJHHYDOXDWLRQ��SDUDPHWHU�DQG�VHQW�RQ�WKH�EXV�ZLWK�D�GHOD\�RIDSSUR[�����VHFRQGV�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�VHWWLQJ�RI�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�6HQG�RQ�FKDQJH�DW�LQSXW�DQG�RQ�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ��:KHQ�VHW�WR��ULVLQJ�HGJH��D�ORJLFDO�����VLJQDO�VWDWH�LV�UHTXLUHGWR�VHQGLQJ��DQG�D�ORJLFDO�����ZKHQ�VHW�WR��IDOOLQJ�HGJH��

�<HV���7KH�VLJQDO�VWDWHV�DW�WKH�LQSXWV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�EXV�YROWDJHUHVWRUDWLRQ�

�1R���7KH�VLJQDO�VWDWHV�DW�WKH�LQSXWV�DUH�QRW�VHQW�RQ�EXVYROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�

7HOHJUDP�UDWH�OLPLW GLVDEOHGHQDEOHG

7HOHJUDP�UDWH�OLPLW ����WHOHJUDPV�SHU����VHF����WHOHJUDPV�SHU����VHF����WHOHJUDPV�SHU����VHF�����WHOHJUDPV�SHU����VHF�

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�DOORZV�\RX�WR�OLPLW�WKH�QXPEHU�RI�WHOHJUDPVWKDW�FDQ�EH�VHQW�LQ�D�JLYHQ�SHULRG�RI�WLPH�WR�DYRLG�EXVRYHUORDG�FDXVHG�E\�H[FHVV�WHOHJUDPV�IURP�PDOIXQFWLRQLQJSXVK�EXWWRQV�

7HOHJUDP�UDWH�OLPLW��GLVDEOHG���7KHUH�LV�QR�OLPLW�WR�VHQGLQJWHOHJUDPV�

7HOHJUDP�UDWH�OLPLW��HQDEOHG���$�PD[LPXP�RI�HLWKHU������������RU�����WHOHJUDPV�FDQ�EH�VHQW�SHU����VHFRQG�SHULRG�

,QSXW�$�

7KH� SDUDPHWHUV� RI� WKH� LQSXWV� %� WR� '� FDQ� EH� VHWDFFRUGLQJO\�

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

(GJH�HYDOXDWLRQ ULVLQJ��RQ��IDOOLQJ��RIIULVLQJ��RII��IDOOLQJ��RQULVLQJ��RQIDOOLQJ��RQULVLQJ��RIIIDOOLQJ��RIIULVLQJ��WRJJOHIDOOLQJ��WRJJOHULVLQJ��WRJJOH��IDOOLQJ��WRJJOHQR�HYDOXDWLRQ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�GHILQHV�WKH�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�WKDW�LV�WR�EHZULWWHQ�WR�WKH�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW�RQ�DQ�DSSURSULDWHFKDQJH�RI�VLJQDO�VWDWH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�

7KH�ULVLQJ�HGJH�LV�D�FKDQJH�RI�WKH�VLJQDO�VWDWH�IURP�ORJLFDO����WR������WKH�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�LV�D�FKDQJH�IURP�ORJLFDO�����WR�����

�ULVLQJ��RQ��IDOOLQJ��RII���2Q�D�ULVLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQWR�WKH�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW��RQ�D�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LVZULWWHQ�

�ULVLQJ��RII��IDOOLQJ��RQ���2Q�D�ULVLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQWR�WKH�FRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW��RQ�D�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LVZULWWHQ�

�ULVLQJ��RQ���2Q�D�ULVLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ�WR�WKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW��IDOOLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�IDOOLQJ��RQ���2Q�D�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ�WR�WKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW��ULVLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�ULVLQJ��RII���2Q�D�ULVLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ�WR�WKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW��IDOOLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�IDOOLQJ��RII���2Q�D�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ�WR�WKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW��ULVLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�ULVLQJ��WRJJOH���2Q�D�ULVLQJ�HGJH�WKH�REMHFW�VWDWH�LV�LQYHUWHG�L�H��D�ORJLFDO�����EHFRPHV�D�ORJLFDO�����DQG�YLFH�YHUVD��,�H���RQWKH�ILUVW�HGJH�FKDQJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ��RQ�WKH�QH[W�HGJHFKDQJH�D�����HWF���)DOOLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�IDOOLQJ��WRJJOH���2Q�D�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�WKH�REMHFW�VWDWH�LV�LQYHUWHG�L�H��D�ORJLFDO�����EHFRPHV�D�ORJLFDO�����DQG�YLFH�YHUVD��,�H���RQWKH�ILUVW�HGJH�FKDQJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ��RQ�WKH�QH[W�HGJHFKDQJH�D�����LV�ZULWWHQ�HWF��5LVLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG�

�ULVLQJ��WRJJOH��IDOOLQJ��WRJJOH���2Q�HYHU\�HGJH�FKDQJH�IURP����WR�����DQG�IURP�����WR�����WKH�REMHFW�VWDWH�LV�LQYHUWHG��,�H���RQWKH�ILUVW�HGJH�FKDQJH�D�ORJLFDO�����LV�ZULWWHQ��RQ�WKH�QH[W�HGJHFKDQJH�D�����LV�ZULWWHQ�HWF�

��QR�HYDOXDWLRQ����&KDQJHV�RI�WKH�VLJQDO�HGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�GRQRW�FKDQJH�WKH�REMHFW�VWDWH��7KH�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWH�RI�WKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW�FDQ�RQO\�EH�FKDQJHG�E\�EXVWHOHJUDPV�

Page 57: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��%LQ&\FO�������

Siemens Technical Manual 1998 3/93

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

6HQG�FRQGLWLRQV��VHQG�RQFKDQJH�DW�LQSXW�RU�RQ�EXVYROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ

ULVLQJ�DQG�IDOOLQJ�HGJHULVLQJ�HGJHIDOOLQJ�HGJHQR�VHQGLQJ

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�ZKHWKHU�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�D�FKDQJHRI�WKH�VLJQDO�HGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�DQG�RQ�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQZLWK�DQ�DSSURSULDWH�LQSXW�VLJQDO��7KH�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWHV�WR��RQ�DQG��RII��WHOHJUDPV�FDQ�EH�GHILQHG�ZLWK�WKH�SDUDPHWHU��(GJHHYDOXDWLRQ���7KH�ULVLQJ�HGJH�LV�D�FKDQJH�RI�WKH�VLJQDO�VWDWHIURP�ORJLFDO�����WR�����DQG�D�����VLJQDO�VWDWH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�RQ�EXVYROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ��7KH�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�LV�D�FKDQJH�RI�WKH�VLJQDOVWDWH�IURP�ORJLFDO�����WR�����DQG�D�����VLJQDO�VWDWH�DW�WKH�LQSXWRQ�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�

�ULVLQJ�DQG�IDOOLQJ�HGJH���2Q�HYHU\�HGJH�FKDQJH�IURP�����WR����DQG�IURP�����WR�����DQG�RQ�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�ZLWK�HLWKHUVLJQDO�VWDWH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�D�WHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�

�ULVLQJ�HGJH���2Q�HYHU\�ULVLQJ�HGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�D�WHOHJUDP�LVVHQW��IDOOLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG��2Q�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�DWHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�RQO\�ZLWK�D�ORJLFDO�����DW�WKH�LQSXW�

�IDOOLQJ�HGJH���2Q�HYHU\�IDOOLQJ�HGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�D�WHOHJUDP�LVVHQW��ULVLQJ�HGJHV�DUH�LJQRUHG��2Q�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�DWHOHJUDP�LV�VHQW�RQO\�ZLWK�D�ORJLFDO�����DW�WKH�LQSXW�

�QR�VHQGLQJ���1R�WHOHJUDPV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�FKDQJHV�RI�WKH�VLJQDOHGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�RU�RQ�EXV�YROWDJH�UHVWRUDWLRQ�

6HQG�FRQGLWLRQ��F\FOLF�VHQG QR�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJF\FOLF�RQ�RQO\F\FOLF�RIIF\FOLF�RQ�DQG�RII

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�ZKHWKHU�VZLWFKLQJ�YDOXHV�RI�WKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ�REMHFW�WR�EH�VHQW�RQ�WKH�EXV�ZLWK�WKHVSHFLILHG�F\FOLF�VHQG�IUHTXHQF\�

�QR�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ���7HOHJUDPV�DUH�QRW�VHQW�F\FOLFDOO\�

�F\FOLF�RQ�RQO\���2QO\�D�ORJLFDO�����REMHFW�VWDWH�LV�VHQW�F\FOLFDOO\RQ�WKH�EXV��7KH�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ�HQGV�RQ�FKDQJH�RI�WKH�VLJQDOHGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�RU�RQ�UHFHLYLQJ�D�EXV�WHOHJUDP�WR�FKDQJHIURP�����WR�����

�F\FOLF�RII�RQO\���2QO\�D�ORJLFDO�����REMHFW�VWDWH�LV�VHQWF\FOLFDOO\�RQ�WKH�EXV��7KH�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ�HQGV�RQ�FKDQJH�RIWKH�VLJQDO�HGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�RU�RQ�UHFHLYLQJ�D�EXV�WHOHJUDP�WRFKDQJH�IURP�����WR�����

�F\FOLF�RQ�DQG�RII���%RWK�VZLWFKLQJ�VWDWHV�DUH�VHQW�RQ�WKH�EXVF\FOLFDOO\��2Q�FKDQJH�RI�WKH�VLJQDO�HGJH�DW�WKH�LQSXW�RU�RQUHFHLYLQJ�DQ�DSSURSULDWH�EXV�WHOHJUDP�WKH�QHZ�VWDWH�LV�VHQWF\FOLFDOO\�

&\FOLF�VHQG��EDVH�YDOXH WLPHU�EDVH�����VHFRQGVWLPHU�EDVH�����PVWLPHU�EDVH�����PVWLPHU�EDVH�����PVWLPHU�EDVH�����VHFRQGVWLPHU�EDVH�����VHFRQGVWLPHU�EDVH�����VHFRQGVWLPHU�EDVH����VHFRQGVWLPHU�EDVH����VHFRQGVWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����PLQWLPHU�EDVH����PLQWLPHU�EDVH����PLQWLPHU�EDVH�����K

3DUDPHWHUV 6HWWLQJV

&\FOLF�VHQG��IDFWRU�������� ��

7KLV�SDUDPHWHU�UXOHV�WKH�IUHTXHQF\�WR�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJWHOHJUDPV�RQ�WKH�EXV��7KH�F\FOLF�VHQG�IUHTXHQF\�LV�JHQHUDWHGE\�PXOWLSO\LQJ�WKH�VSHFLILHG�EDVH�ZLWK�WKH�VHOHFWHG�IDFWRU�:KHQ�WKH�F\FOLF�VHQGLQJ�LV�GLVDEOHG��WKHVH�SDUDPHWHUV�DUHLJQRUHG�

1RWH��$V�WKH�VSHFLILHG�EDVH�HTXDOV�WKH�PD[LPXP�WLPLQJHUURU��WKH�VPDOOHVW�SRVVLEOH�EDVH�VKRXOG�EH�XVHG�WR�HVWDEOLVKWKH�GHVLUHG�IUHTXHQF\�

7LPLQJ�'LDJUDPV��,QSXW�([DPSOHV

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�HGJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��ULVLQJ��RQ���IDOOLQJ��RII�VHQG�FRQGLWLRQ��ULVLQJ��IDOOLQJ�HGJHF\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��GLVDEOHG

Object value

on off on offoff on

Input signal

1

0

bus telegrams

1

0

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�HGJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��ULVLQJ��RII���IDOOLQJ��RQ�VHQG�FRQGLWLRQ��ULVLQJ�HGJHF\FOLF�VHQGLQJ��GLVDEOHG

Object value

off off off

Input signal

1

0

bus telegrams

1

0

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�HGJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��ULVLQJ��RQ���IDOOLQJ��RII�VHQG�FRQGLWLRQ��ULVLQJ��IDOOLQJ�HGJHF\FOLF�VHQGLQJ���RQ��DQG��RII�

Object value

off

Input signal

1

0

bus telegrams

1

0

on on on off off on off

Page 58: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

LQVWDEXV�(,%

$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URJUDPV�'HVFULSWLRQV

���6��%LQ&\FO�������

3/94 Siemens Technical Manual 1998

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�HGJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��ULVLQJ��RII���IDOOLQJ��RQ�VHQG�FRQGLWLRQ��ULVLQJ��IDOOLQJ�HGJHF\FOLF�VHQGLQJ���RII�

Object value

off off

Input signal

1

0

bus telegrams

1

0

on on off off off off

�� &RQILJXUDWLRQ�HGJH�HYDOXDWLRQ��ULVLQJ��RQ�VHQG�FRQGLWLRQ��ULVLQJ��IDOOLQJ�HGJHF\FOLF�VHQGLQJ���RQ�

Object value

Input signal

1

0

bus telegrams

1

0

on on on on on on on on on on

Page 59: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

June 2002

12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01

Siemens AG 221C01, 6 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2002 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without further notice 3.12.2.6.1/1

Application program usage Product family: Physical sensors Product type: Brightness and Temperature Manufacturer: Siemens Name: Dual Sensor for Brightness and

Temperature AP 254 Order-No.: 5WG1 254-3EY01 Functional description The Dual Sensor AP 254 provides ambient light level and outdoor temperature values. These values can be sent onto the bus. Further the device controls load switches, dimmers and blinds / shutters based on threshold settings for ambient light level and outdoor temperature: • Threshold setting for light level controls • Threshold setting for temperature controls • Threshold setting for shading controls (combination of

light –level and temperature) Additionally one or more thresholds can be temporarily deactivated via an interlocking object (1 Bit). Communication objects

Note Your screen presentation may vary from these typical snap shots.

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Brightness value Lux-value

(EIS 5) 2 Byte KÜ

Depending on the parameters set, it sends the current value of brightness cyclically and/or upon a change of brightness.

1 Temperature °C-value (EIS 5)

2 Byte KÜ

Depending on the parameters set, it sends the current tem-perature value cyclically and/or upon a change of tempera-ture.

3 Brightness threshold 1 On/Off 1 Bit KÜ 8-bit Value

(EIS 6) 1 Byte KÜ

4 Brightness threshold 2 On/Off 1 Bit KÜ 5 Brightness threshold 3 On/Off 1 Bit KÜ

The parameterized telegram is sent if the value exceeds or falls below the set threshold value. Important: Threshold 1 (Object 3) can also be parameterized as an automatic brightness control: Dimming telegrams are sent until the brightness measured has reached the setpoint value. Constant light level control is performed within the parameter-ized hysteresis.

6 Temperature threshold 1

On/Off 1 Bit KÜ

7 Temperature threshold 2

On/Off 1 Bit KÜ

The parameterized telegram is sent if the value exceeds or falls below the set threshold value.

8 Logic function 1 On/Off 1 Bit KÜ 9 Logic function 2 On/Off 1 Bit KÜ

The parameterized telegram is sent if the value exceeds or falls below the set threshold value. 10 Blocking 0=normal /

1=blocked 1 Bit KLSÜ

Via this 1-bit object sending of each single object can be blocked (Blocking=1) or released (Blocking=0). The parame-ters are set on the parameter tabs for the object to be blo-cked.

Note When the Blocking object is set to normal then each object that was blocked immediately sends its current value. In case of bus voltage failure the Blocking object is set to the value of 0. Note The value of a communication object is only initialized or updated when sending based on an event. A visualiza-tion should not read the value of these objects.

Page 60: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

June 2002

12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01

Technical manual 221C01, 6 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2002 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without further notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.12.2.6.1/2

Maximum number of group addresses: 15 Maximum number of assignments: 15 Parameter General Parameter Settings Number of brightness thresholds

1 brightness threshold 2 brightness thresholds 3 brightness thresholds

Setting defining how many thresholds shall be used. Function of brightness threshold 1

Brightness threshold automatic brightness control

Setting defining whether brightness threshold 1 shall be used as a threshold switch or as an automatic brightness control. IMPORTANT: If threshold 1 is used as an automatic brightness control it can no longer be included in a logic function! Number of temperature thresholds

No temperature thresholds 1 temperature threshold 2 temperature thresholds

Setting defining if and how many temperature thresholds shall be used. Number of logic function objects

No logic operation 1 logic function object 2 logic function objects

Setting defining if and how many logic function objects shall be used.

Brightness value

Parameter Settings Minimal change of brightness to transmit a new value

No sending on change 5% min. 1 lux 10% min. 1 lux 20% min. 1 lux 30% min. 1 lux

Setting defining by what percentage the measured new brightness value must deviate from the brightness value sent last to be sent again.

Parameter Settings Interval for cyclical sending

No cyclical sending 1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the interval at which the brightness value is sent repeatedly to the bus.

Note If both „no sending on change“ and „no cyclical sending“ are selected then sending is not performed. Temperature value

Note If both „no sending on change“ and „no cyclical sending“ are selected then sending is not performed. Parameter Settings Minimal change of tem-perature to transmit a new value

No sending on change on change 1K on change of 2K on change of 3K

Setting defining by what value the measured new temperature value must deviate from the temperature value sent last to be sent again. Interval for cyclical sending

No cyclical sending 1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the cycle interval at which the telegram is repeatedly sent via the bus.

Page 61: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

June 2002

12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01

Siemens AG 221C01, 6 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2002 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without further notice 3.12.2.6.1/3

Parameter Settings Temperature offset in 0,1K (-128 ... 127)

0

Enables a correction of the temperature measured if this tem-perature deviates from the true temperature due to the position of the device. The correction is performed in steps of 0.1 degrees i.e. from -12,8 to +12,7K. Example: The value 5 corresponds to a correction of 0.5 degrees. The value 10 equals 1 degree. In the latter case the device will send the following value when it measures a temperature of 20°C: 20 + 1 = 21°C.

Automatic brightness control

Parameter Settings Set point for brightness control in 10 Lux

20 .

100 .

250 Setting of the set point for automatic brightness control. Permissible set point values are 200 to 2500 Lux, where the set point is entered as 20...250 * 10 Lux. Hysteresis 10% min. 1 lux

20% min. 1 lux 30% min. 1 lux 50% min. 1 lux

The hysteresis suppresses sending if the measured bright-ness value is in the range [set point ; set point plus hystere-sis]. The hysteresis is defined as the maximum of x% (x=10, 20, 30 or 50) of the set point or 1 Lux. Limit number of tele-grams for automatic control

Max. 2 telegrams per second Max. 1 telegram per second max. 1 telegram in 2 seconds

This parameter limits the number of control telegrams to reduce the bus load.

Parameter Settings Control speed Slow

Medium Fast

This parameter determines how fast the automatic brightness control reaches the set point. Note: The setting „fast“ can lead to over-shooting of the control loop set point. Interval for cyclical sending

1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the cycle interval at which the telegram is repeat-edly sent via the bus. Behaviour if blocking object is ON

Blocking disable blocking enable

If the Blocking object is set to 1 = blocking and this parameter is set to blocking enable then sending for this object is inhib-ited.

Brightness threshold 1 (2,3)

Function and parameters for Brightness thresholds 1, 2 and 3 are identical and described once only. Parameter Settings Threshold 2

. .

500 lux . .

100000 lux Setting at which brightness level the switching threshold has been reached.

Page 62: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

June 2002

12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01

Technical manual 221C01, 6 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2002 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without further notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.12.2.6.1/4

Parameter Settings Hysteresis 10% min. 1 lux

20% min. 1 lux 30% min. 1 lux 50% min. 1 lux

The hysteresis suppresses sending if the measured bright-ness level is in the range [set point minus hysteresis; set point]. A threshold overflow is detected when the measured bright-ness value rises above the threshold. A threshold underflow is detected when the measured bright-ness value falls under [threshold minus hysteresis]. The hysteresis is the maximum of x% (x=10, 20, 30 or 50) of the threshold or 1 Lux. Delay above threshold Undelayed

2 seconds ... (5, 10, 15, 20 seconds) 30 seconds ... (45, 60, 90 seconds) ... (2, 3, 5, 10, 15 minutes) 30 minutes

Delay between detection of a threshold overflow and the reaction to it (sending a telegram). It prevents false switching because of luminous reflectance or transient shading. Recommendation: Lighting control 2...60s Shading device 5... 30min Delay below threshold Undelayed

2 seconds ... (5, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds) 45 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds ... (2, 3, 5, 10, 15 minutes) 30 minutes

Delay between detection of a threshold underflow and the reaction to it (sending a telegram). It prevents false switching because of luminous reflectance or transient shading. Recommendation: Lighting control 2...60s Shading device 5... 30min Note: To avoid false switching the device is designed with a delay in case of a threshold underflow. The base delay is always present and cannot be changed by this parameter.

Brightness object 1 (2,3)

Function and parameters for Brightness objects 1, 2 and 3 are identical and described once only. Parameter Settings Function of threshold object

Switch Send value

The type of telegram that shall be sent. Switch on/ switch off telegram or value (0 ... 255). Behaviour above thresh-old

Do not send any telegrams send telegram only once send telegram cyclically

send no value send value only once cyclical sending

Setting defining if and how often a telegram shall be sent in case of threshold overflow. Telegram Switch off

switch on Value 0

[0 ... 255] Setting defining what shall be sent in case of threshold over-flow. Behaviour below thresh-old

Do not send any telegrams send telegrams only once cyclical sending

send no value send value only once send value cyclically

Setting defining if and how often a telegram shall be sent in case of threshold underflow. Telegram Switch off

switch on Value 0

[0 ... 255] Setting defining what shall be sent in case of threshold under-flow.

Page 63: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

June 2002

12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01

Siemens AG 221C01, 6 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2002 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without further notice 3.12.2.6.1/5

Parameter Settings Interval for cyclical sending

1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the cycle interval at which the telegram is repeat-edly sent via the bus. Behaviour if blocking object is ON

Blocking disable blocking enable

If the Blocking object is set to 1 = blocking and this parameter is set to blocking enable then sending for this object is inhib-ited.

Temperature threshold 1 (2)

Function and parameters for Temperature threshold 1, 2 and 3 are identical and described once only. Parameter Settings Threshold value in °C [-15 ..50]

5

Setting of the temperature threshold. Hysteresis 1 K

2 K 3K 4K

The hysteresis suppresses sending if the measured tempera-ture is in the range [set point minus hysteresis; set point]. A threshold overflow is detected when the measured temperature rises above the threshold. A threshold underflow is detected when the measured tem-perature falls under [threshold minus hysteresis]. The hysteresis is the maximum of x% (x=10, 20, 30 or 50) of the threshold or 1 Lux. Function of threshold object

Switch send value

Parameter Settings The type of telegram to be sent: Switch on/switch off telegram or value (0 ... 255) Behaviour above thresh-old

Do not send any telegrams send telegram only once send telegram cyclically

send no value send value only once cyclical sending

Setting defining if and how often a telegram shall be sent in case of threshold overflow. Telegram Switch off

switch on Value 0

[0 ... 255] Setting defining what shall be sent in case of threshold over-flow. Behaviour below thresh-old

Do not send any telegrams send telegram only once send telegram cyclically

send no value send value only once cyclical sending

Setting defining if and how often a telegram shall be sent in case of threshold underflow. Telegram Switch off

switch on Value 0

[0 ... 255] Setting defining what shall be sent in case of threshold under-flow. Interval for cyclical sending

1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the cycle interval at which the telegram is repeat-edly sent via the bus. Behaviour if blocking object is ON

Blocking disable blocking enable

If the Blocking object is set to 1 = blocking and this parameter is set to blocking enable then sending for this object is inhib-ited.

Page 64: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

June 2002

12 S2 Brightness and Temperature 221C01

Technical manual 221C01, 6 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2002 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without further notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.12.2.6.1/6

Logic function 1 (2)

Function and parameters for Logic functions 1 and 2 are identical and described once only. Parameter Settings If brightness is not evaluated

higher than brightness threshold 1 higher than brightness threshold 2 higher than brightness threshold 3 lower than brightness threshold 1 lower than brightness threshold 2 lower than brightness threshold 3

First part of logic function: What shall the brightness value be to fulfil the logic function condition? Important note: If the Brightness threshold 1 is used for automatic brightness control then it shall not be used in the logic functions! and if temperature is not evaluated

higher than temperature thresh-old 1 higher than temperature threshold 2higher than temperature threshold 3lower than temperature threshold 1 lower than temperature threshold 2 lower than temperature threshold 3

second part of logic function: What shall the temperature value be to fulfil the logic function condition together with the brightness value?

Logic object 1 (2)

Function and parameters for Logic function objects 1 and 2 are identical and described once only.

Parameter Settings Function of the logic object 1

Switch send value

Type of the telegram which is to be sent; switching On/Off telegram or value (0 ... 255) Behaviour if logic opera-tion is true

Do not send any telegrams send telegram only once send telegram cyclically

send no value send value only once cyclical sending

Setting defining if and how often a telegram shall be sent in case the logic operation is true. Telegram Switch off

switch on Value 0

[0 ... 255] Setting defining what shall be sent in case the logic function result is true. Behaviour if logic opera-tion is false

Do not send any telegrams send telegram only once send telegram cyclically

send no value send value only once cyclical sending

Setting defining if and how often a telegram shall be sent in case the logic operation is false. Telegram Switch off

switch on Value 0

[0 ... 255] Setting defining what shall be sent in case the logic function result is false. Interval for cyclical sending

1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the cycle interval at which the telegram is repeat-edly sent via the bus. Behaviour if blocking object is ON

Blocking disable blocking enable

If the Blocking object is set to 1 = blocking and this parameter is set to blocking enable then sending for this object is inhib-ited.

Page 65: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Program Description

April 2002

11 S2 Switching, Value, Scene 221D01

Siemens AG 221D01, 4 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2002 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without further notice 3.17.2.3.1/1

Application program usage Product family: Timer Product type: REG-Devices Manufacturer: Siemens Name: 2-channel Time-switch REG 371 Order-No.: 5WG1 371-5EY01 Functional description The 2-channel time switch REG 371 (weekly scheduler) with integrated bus coupling unit is a DIN rail mounted device for mounting in distribution boards. The connec-tion to EIB is made via a bus connector. The time switch offers: 36 schedules, which may be assigned to one, several or all weekdays (free block formation). Additionally, the REG 371 is already set ex factory with the current time and valid Middle European settings for daylight savings time switchover (summer / winter time). If another or no switchover is desired this can be set as described in the operation manual. - Programmed schedules are saved for up to 10 years in

case the bus voltage fails and the back-up battery runs low

- automatic program review - 99 days holiday program, programmable 99 days in

advance - switching pre-select - permanent ON/OFF - Lithium battery backup, approx. 6 years On each channel switching, priority and dimming or value messages can be transmitted at pre-set times. Application examples • Ideally suited for residential applications and smaller

EIB projects • Up to four telegrams may be sent to the bus when

one channel schedule switches (e.g. at the end of a work day: switch off main lighting, close shutters, re-duce room temperature, lock perimeter doors)

Communication objects

Note Your screen presentation may vary from these typical snap shots. Obj Object name Function Type Flag 0 Channel 1 – On / Off 1 Bit KÜ Object A 8-bit Value

(EIS 6) 1 Byte

Positive drive (EIS 8)

2 Bit

1 Channel 1 – Object B

... ... KÜ

2 Channel 1 – Object C

... ... KÜ

3 Channel 1 – Object D

... ... KÜ

4 Channel 2 – On / Off 1 Bit KÜ Object A 8-bit Value

(EIS 6) 1 Byte

Positive drive (EIS 8)

2 Bit

5 Channel 2 – Object B

... ... KÜ

6 Channel 2 – Object C

... ... KÜ

7 Channel 2 – Object D

... ... KÜ

On / Off: Send a switching telegram when scheduler channel 1 or scheduler channel 2 switches. 8-bit Value (EIS 6): Send an 8-bit value (dimming, set value), when scheduler channel 1 or scheduler channel 2 switches. Positive drive (EIS 8): Send an 8-bit value (dimming, set value), when scheduler channel 1 or scheduler channel 2 switches.

Page 66: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Program Description

April 2002

11 S2 Switching, Value, Scene 221D01

Technical manual 221D01, 4 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2002 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without further notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.17.2.3.1/2

Obj Object name Function Type Flag 8 0= normal /

1= blocked Blocking 1 Bit KSÜ

If Blocking is set to 1 = blocked and the parameter for block-ing of a channel object is enabled then sending for that channel object is blocked.

Note Requesting the value of a communication object is not possible. Maximum number of group addresses: 11 Maximum number of assignments: 11 Parameter General

Parameter Settings Number of objects for channel 1

1 object 2 objects 3 objects 4 objects

Setting for how many scene objects shall be available for channel 1. Number of objects for channel 2

1 object 2 objects 3 objects 4 objects

Setting for how many scene objects shall be available for channel 2. Interval for cyclical sending 2,5 minutes

5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes

Setting of the time interval used for sending telegrams re-peatedly to the bus. For small time values the real length of the interval may differ slightly from the value set. This parameter applies to all communication objects which are set for “cyclical sending”.

Switching Channel 1 (2) – Object A (B-D)

Function and parameters of channels 1 - 2 and the cor-responding objects A - D are identical and described only once. Parameter Settings Function switch

8-bit value positive drive

Select if a switch (1 bit) , value (8 bit) or positive drive (2 bit) telegram shall be sent via this scheduler channel. Behaviour if clock switches OFF

send telegram do not send any telegrams

Select if a telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off. Switching telegram switch off

switch on This parameter appears if a switching telegram shall be sent. Select if a “0” or “1” telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off. Behaviour if clock switches ON

send telegram do not send any telegrams

Select if a telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches on. switching telegram switch off

switch on This parameter appears if a switching telegram shall be sent. Select if a “0” or “1” telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off. Behaviour of sending cyclical sending

no cyclical sending Select if the telegram shall be sent once only or cyclically. Behaviour if blocking ob-ject is ON

ignore blocking enable blocking

If the EIB object Blocking is set to 1 = blocking and this pa-rameter is set to enable blocking then sending for this channel is blocked. Behaviour at the beginning of blocking

do not send any telegramssend following telegram once

This parameter appears if blocking is enabled. It determines the sending behaviour when blocking starts.

Page 67: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Program Description

April 2002

11 S2 Switching, Value, Scene 221D01

Siemens AG 221D01, 4 pages Technical manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2002 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without further notice 3.17.2.3.1/3

Parameter Settings as if clock switches OFF

as if clock switches ON This parameter appears if a telegram shall be sent once after blocking starts.

8-bit Value Channel 1 (2) – Object A (B – D)

Function and parameters of channels 1 - 2 and the cor-responding objects A - D are identical and described only once. Parameter Settings Function switch

8-bit value positive drive

Select if a switch (1 bit) , value (8 bit) or positive drive (2 bit) telegram shall be sent via this scheduler channel. Behaviour if clock switches OFF

send telegram do not send any telegrams

Select if a telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off. Value (0-255) 50 This parameter appears if a value telegram shall be sent. Select which value telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off. Behaviour if clock switches ON

send telegram do not send any telegrams

Select if a telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches on. Value (0-255) 200 This parameter appears if a value telegram shall be sent. Select which value telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches on. Behaviour of sending cyclical sending

no cyclical sending Select if the telegram shall be sent once only or cyclically.

Parameter Settings Behaviour if blocking ob-ject is ON

ignore blocking enable blocking

If the EIB object Blocking is set to 1 = blocking and this pa-rameter is set to enable blocking then sending for this channel is blocked. Behaviour at the beginning of blocking

do not send any telegramssend following telegram once

This parameter appears if blocking is enabled. It determines the sending behaviour when blocking starts. as if clock switches OFF

as if clock switches ON This parameter appears if a telegram shall be sent once after blocking starts.

Positive drive Channel 1 (2) – Object A (B – D)

Function and parameters of channels 1 - 2 and the cor-responding objects A - D are identical and described only once. Parameter Settings Function switch

8-bit value positive drive

Select if a switch (1 bit) , value (8 bit) or positive drive (2 bit) telegram shall be sent via this scheduler channel. Behaviour if clock switches OFF

send telegram do not send any telegrams

Select if a telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off. Positive drive disable positive drive

switch OFF with positive drive switch ON with positive drive

This parameter appears if a positive drive telegram shall be sent. Select which positive drive telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches off.

Page 68: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Program Description

April 2002

11 S2 Switching, Value, Scene 221D01

Technical manual 221D01, 4 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2002 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without further notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.17.2.3.1/4

Parameter Settings Behaviour if clock switches ON

send telegram do not send any telegrams

Select if a telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches on. Positive drive disable positive drive

switch OFF with positive driveswitch ON with positive drive

This parameter appears if a positive drive telegram shall be sent. Select which positive drive telegram shall be sent when the clock channel switches on. Behaviour of sending cyclical sending

no cyclical sending Select if the telegram shall be sent once only or cyclically. Behaviour if blocking ob-ject is ON

ignore blocking enable blocking

If the EIB object Blocking is set to 1 = blocking and this pa-rameter is set to enable blocking then sending for this channel is blocked. Behaviour at the beginning of blocking

do not send any telegramssend following telegram once

This parameter appears if blocking is enabled. It determines the sending behaviour when blocking starts. as if clock switches OFF

as if clock switches ON This parameter appears if a telegram shall be sent once after blocking starts.

Positive drive Actuators with positive drive input allow for overriding of outputs via central control commands. E.g. when in energy savings or night operation mode switching on of selected lights or loads can be blocked. In the case of night operation mode a switch OFF posi-tive drive telegram may be sent at 20h00 and at 06h00 a switch ON positive drive telegram. For explanation of positive drive assume a switch actua-tor with two input objects. The input object switching controls the output dependent on the status of the input positive drive.

Positive drive

ObjectsChannel A

Relay

Status

positivedrive

>1&

&

1 Bit 0

switching

The positive drive object is a 2-bit object. Bit 1 determines, whether positive drive is “active” (= 1) or „passive“ (= 0). If Bit 1 has the value 0, then positive drive is set to be „passive“ and the switching input value is directly avail-able at the positive drive output. At the same time this value is loaded into Bit 0 of the positive drive object. Thus Bit 0 of the positive drive object always contains the status. If Bit 1 of the positive drive object has the value 1, then the positive drive is set to be “active“ and the switching input value is irrelevant for the output value. In this case Bit 0 of the positive drive object determines the output of the positive drive. If positive drive is not activated then the switching input value is directly available at the out-put of the positive drive.

Bit 1 Bit 0 Function 0 0 Positive drive is not activated 0 1 Positive drive is not activated 1 0 Off with positive drive object value 1 1 On with positive drive object value

Page 69: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Programs Description

September 2001

12 CO Time 740202

Devices Employing the Program Product family: Controller Product type: Controller Manufacturer: Siemens Name: Timer module N 302 Order-no.: 5WG1 302-1AB01 Application Description This application program allows you to make time switch tasks and "on" and "off" delays to switch operations. Four mutually independent channels are available with separate input and output objects each. Furthermore, these channels can be locked and released via an addi-tional locking object.

Verrieg.

Input B timerINV INV send condition

Inputobjects

outputobjects

Input C

Input D

Input A

Outp. B

Outp. A timerINV INV send condition

timerINV INV send condition

timerINV INV send condition Outp. D

Outp. C

INV

The following operating modes are available: Input inversion: The values received at the four inputs can be inverted before forwarding them to the corresponding timer.

Siemens AG 740202, 4 pages Technical Manual

Switch on delay: On receiving a logical "1" at the timer, the switch on delay is initiated as specified in the parameter list. Each further "1" re-starts the timer. Once the delay period has passed, the "1" is forwarded to the output object. On receiving a logical "0" during the delay period the switch on delay is cancelled. Switch off delay: On receiving a logical "0" at the timer, the switch off delay is initiated as specified in the parameter list. Each further "0" re-starts the timer. Once the delay period has passed, the "0" is forwarded to the output object. On receiving a logical "1" during the delay period the switch on delay is cancelled.

Time switch (staircase lighting mode): When the timer receives a logical "1" this is forwarded to the output object according to the switch on delay as specified in the parameter list. Simultaneously, the se-lected switch off delay is initiated. Each subsequent "1" during the delay period re-starts the timer. Once the delay period has passed a logical "0" is forwarded to the output object. When receiving a "0" during the delay period, it is forwarded to the output immediately cancel-ling the delay. Output inversion: Output values can be inverted before sending them on the bus. Send condition: The sending filter rules whether only logical "0"s or "1"s are sent or both output values. Communication Objects

Note: The order of the entries may vary from the above due to individual customization of the table. Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 Channel A Input 1-Bit CWTU

Via the group addresses of this input object the switching telegrams to timer channel A are received. 1 Channel A Output 1-Bit CTU

Via the group address of this output object the result at the timer channel A is sent. 2 Channel B Input 1-Bit CWTU

Via the group addresses of this input object the switching telegrams to timer channel B are received.

Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.11.1.3.1/1

Page 70: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Programs Description

September 2001

12 CO Time 740202

Technical Manual 740202, 4 pages Siemens AG

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 3 Channel B Output 1-Bit CTU

Via the group address of this output object the result at the timer channel B is sent. 4 Channel C Input 1-Bit CWTU

Via the group addresses of this input object the switching telegrams to timer channel C are received. 5 Channel C Output 1-Bit CTU

Via the group address of this output object the result at the timer channel C is sent. 6 Channel D Input 1-Bit CWTU

Via the group addresses of this input object the switching telegrams to timer channel D are received. 7 Channel D Output 1-Bit CTU

Via the group address of this output object the result at the timer channel D is sent. 8 Interlocking Channels A-D 1-Bit CWTU

Via the group addresses of the locking object lock/release telegrams are received. Parameters are provided to specify-ing individually to each timer channel whether the status of the locking object is to be evaluated.

Maximum number of group addresses: 13 Maximum number of assignments: 13 Note: At the bus coupling unit the four output objects share a single memory unit that holds the timer channel result that was received last, the timer channels overwrite each others results. As this is the only information that can be read from an output, the status of a specific output can-not be read. Parameters General:

Parameters Settings Interlocking on object value 0

1 This parameter rules the object value to enabling/disabling the interlocking mode: "0": The locking is enabled with "0" telegrams and disabled with "1" telegrams. "1": The locking is enabled with "1" telegrams and disabled with "0" telegrams.

Channel A:

Parameters Settings Send condition on 0 and 1 at output

only on 0 at output only on 1 at output

This parameter defines a sending filer to sending telegrams only on specific status of the output object: "on 0 and 1 at output": Every new object status is sent " only on 0 at output ": Only "0" and "off" telegrams are sent. When the object status is "1" no telegrams are sent. " only on 1 at output ": Only "1" and "on" telegrams are sent. When the object status is "0" no telegrams are sent. Operating mode Normal mode

Time switch This parameter rules switch off delay mode: "Normal mode": On receiving an "off" telegram via the switch-ing object, the specified switch off delay is started. Each subsequent "off" telegram received before the period has passed re-starts the delay anew. When the delay period has passed without receiving a further "off" telegram, a "0" tele-gram is sent to the output. "Time switch ": "On" telegrams received at the timer are forwarded to the output object according to the specified switch on delay. Simultaneously the specified delay is started ignoring any switch on delays. Each subsequent "on" tele-gram received before the period has passed re-starts the delay anew. When the delay period has passed without re-ceiving a further "on" telegram, a "0" telegram is sent to the output. An "off" telegram cancels the switch off delay and is forwarded to the output immediately. Evaluate interlocking object No

Yes This parameter rules whether the timer can be locked and released via the locking object or whether the channel is permanently enabled. "No": The timer is permanently enabled. Every input telegram is sent at the output according the specified delay period and sending condition. "Yes": Telegram are sent only if received while the locking object is set to "release". Locking the timer does not cancel any delays that have already been initiated. I.e. telegrams are sent according the specified delay period even if the timer is locked before the delay period has passed.

Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.11.1.3.1/2

Page 71: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Programs Description

September 2001

12 CO Time 740202

Siemens AG 740202, 4 pages Technical Manual

Parameters Settings Invert output No

Yes The timer's output value can be inverted before passing it on to the channel's output object. "No:" The value is passed on to the output object unchanged. "Yes:" The value is inverted before it is passed on to the output object. Invert input No

Yes The value received at the channel's input object can be in-verted before passing it on to the timer. "No:" The value is passed on to the timer channel unchanged."Yes:" The value is inverted before it is passed on to the timer channel. Base for Off delay Time base 130 ms

Time base 260 ms Time base 520 ms Time base 1 sec Time base 2,1 sec Time base 4,2 sec Time base 8,4 sec Time base 17 sec Time base 34 sec Time base 1,1 min Time base 2,2 min Time base 4,5 min Time base 9 min Time base 18 min Time base 35 min Time base 1,2 hr

Factor for Off delay (0-127)

0

These parameters rules the delay to switching off. The delay period is generated by multiplying the base with the factor. Factor = "0": The switch off delay is disabled. Logical "0"s forwarded to the timer is passed on to the output object im-mediately. Base for On delay Time base 130 ms

Time base 260 ms Time base 520 ms Time base 1 sec Time base 2,1 sec Time base 4,2 sec Time base 8,4 sec Time base 17 sec Time base 34 sec Time base 1,1 min Time base 2,2 min Time base 4,5 min Time base 9 min Time base 18 min Time base 35 min Time base 1,2 hr

Factor for On delay (0-127)

0

These parameters rules the delay to switching "on". The delay period is generated by multiplying the specified base with the selected factor. Factor = "0": The switch off delay is disabled. Logical "1"s forwarded to the timer is passed on to the output object immediately.

The parameters of the channels B to D can be set ac-cordingly.

The below timing diagrams use the parameter setting "Send condition: on 0 and 1 at output". Accordingly only the "off" or "on" telegrams would be sent when using the respective settings.

Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.11.1.3.1/3

Page 72: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application Programs Description

September 2001

12 CO Time 740202

Timing Diagrams: Channel Examples 1. Non delayed switching without inversion

Input telegrams

10

on off

Input time function

Output time function

10

on off on off off on

Output telegrams

on off on off on off off on

2. Switching with switch on delay and no inversion

Input telegrams

10

Input time function

Output time function

10

on off on on off off on

Output telegrams

off off on off on

3. Switching with switch off delay and no inversion

Input telegrams

10

on off

Input time function

Output time function

10

on off on

Output telegrams

off on off on on

off off

4. Switching with on and off delay with no inversion

Input telegrams

10

Input time function

Output time function

10

on off on on off off on

Output telegrams

off on off on

5. Inverted switching with on and off delay

Input telegrams

10

Eingang time function

Output time function

10

on off on on off off on

Output telegrams

off on off on

6. Timed switching with inversion at the input

Input telegrams

10

Input time function

Ausgang time function

10

on

off on on

Output telegrams

off on off on off on

off off

off

off

7. Timed switching with switch on delay and no in-

version

Input telegrams

10

Input time function

Output time function

10

on off on on

Output telegrams

off on off on on off

on on

8. Timed switching with no inversion, with interlock-

ing on object value "0" interlocking telegrams

on on off off

Input telegrams

10

Input time function

Output time function

10

on

on on

Output telegrams

on off on

off off on on

interlocking

off

Technical Manual 740202, 4 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice P.O. Box 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.11.1.3.1/4

Page 73: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

April 2002

01 07 Event-Schedule-Logic 801701

Siemens AG 801701, 6 pages Technical Manual Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Postfach 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.11.1.10.1/1

Application program usage Manufacturer: Siemens Product family: Controller Product type: Controller Name: Event-Schedule-Logic Controller

N 350 Order-No.: 5WG1 350-1AB01 Functional description The Event-Schedule-Logic Controller N350 is a DIN rail mounted device. In a compact unit the module offers – Event programs, – Schedule programs (weekly scheduler) and – Logic functions for binary input and output signals. Up to ten event programs are available. For each event program up to ten event actions may be activated. An event program is triggered via an associated event ob-ject. The event trigger type may be chosen from this list: – Reception of any telegram (0 or 1) – Reception of 1 – Reception of 0 – Change from 0 to 1 – Change from 1 to 0 The value sent (0 or 1) can be defined per event action. The delay of an event action with respect to the time of the event trigger may also be defined. The weekly scheduler provides a total of 100 schedules for 20 time controlled channels. Each schedule switches a time object on the minute at a pre-defined time on one or several days of the week. The schedules are executed based on a controller-internal clock which must be synchronized at least once a day with a master time source. The 4-channel time switch REG 372 (order number: 5WG1 372-3EY01), the 4-channel time switch with DCF77 REG 372/02 (order number: 5WG1 372-3EY02), the ISDN gateway N147 (order number: 5WG1 147-1AB01), or the IP Interface AP146 (order number: 5WG1 146-3AB01) are available as master time clock or time source. Ten logic gates, each with up to six inputs and one out-put, are available. Each gate’s logic may be selected from this list: AND, OR, NAND, NOR. Individual logic gate inputs may be inverted. If the configurable send condition, i.e. send on each reception or only on change

at output, is fulfilled then the send filter determines whether any output value or only 0 or only 1 is sent. With the ETS (EIB Tool Software) the application pro-gram is selected, its parameters and addresses are assigned appropriately, and downloaded to the Event-Schedule-Logic Controller N 350. Application Examples • Indoor and outdoor lighting control applications • Lighting control dependent on outdoor light level and

weekly schedule (opening hours) • Lighting control scenes with dimming in conjunction

with a scene controller • Timer based lighting control • Control of shutters, blinds, and shades • Individual schedules for automated comfort

(heating, lighting, shading...) • Programming for different life styles and user profiles

(scene control) • Irrigation control / water storage control • Garage Door Control Schedule Control examples • Every day the lighting of company garage is automati-

cally turned on at 06:00 and turned off at 22:00. • Monday through Friday the entrance door lighting of a

house is switched on at 18:30 and switched off at 06:00

• Monday through Friday the bed room shutter is raised at 06:00 and closed at 21:30. On Saturday and Sun-day it is opened at 08:30 and closed at 22:00.

Event Control examples • Switch lighting of garage on and open motorized gara-

ge door – but only after authorized entrance. Switch lighting of garage off and close motorized ga-rage door – after a specified delay time has passed and the motion detector has signalled an empty space

• Switch lighting of a house entrance on if the ambient light falls below a certain level (this requires a binary light level detector output) Switch lighting of a house entrance off if the ambient light level rises above a certain level (this requires a binary light level detector output)

Page 74: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

April 2002

01 07 Event-Schedule-Logic 801701

Technical Manual 801701, 6 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice Postfach 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.11.1.10.1/2

Communication objects

Obj Function Object name Type Flag 0 Master time

clock Date 3 Byte C WTU

This object must be connected with the group address for the date sent by the master time clock. The schedule control is not started until date and time are received from the master time clock. 1 Master time

clock Time 3 Byte C WTU

This object must be connected with the group address for the time sent by the master time clock. The schedule control is not started until date and time are received from the master time clock. 2 On / Off 1st Schedule

Object 1 Bit C T

Schedule control for the 1st schedule control channel is executed via the group address assigned to this 1st scheduler control object.

... 21 On / Off 20th Schedule

Object 1 Bit C T

Schedule control for the 20th schedule control channel is executed via the group address assigned to this 20th schedu-ler control object. 22 Event Tigger 1st Event

Program 1 Bit C WTU

The 1st Event Program is triggered via this object. 23 Event Object

1-1 1st Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 1st Event Action of the 1st Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object. 24 Event Object

1-2 1st Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 2nd Event Action of the 1st Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object.

... 32 Event Object

1-10 1st Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 10th Event Action of the 1st Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object. 33 Event Trigger 2nd Event

Program 1 Bit C WTU

The 2nd Event Program is triggered via this object. 34 Event Object

2-1 2nd Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 1st Event Action of the 2nd Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object. 35 Event Object

2-2 2nd Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 2nd Event Action of the 2nd Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object.

... 43 Event Object

2-10 2nd Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 10th Event Action of the 2nd Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object.

... 131 Event Object

10-10 10th Event Program

1 Bit C T

The 10th Event Action of the 10th Event Program is sent to the bus via the group address assigned to this object. 132 Input A 1st Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input A of the 1st Logic Gate. 133 Input B 1st Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input B of the 1st Logic Gate. 134 Input C 1st Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input C of the 1st Logic Gate. 135 Input D 1st Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input D of the 1st Logic Gate. 136 Input E 1st Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input E of the 1st Logic Gate. 137 Input F 1st Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input F of the 1st Logic Gate. 138 Output 1st Gate 1 Bit C T This is Output of the 1st Logic Gate. 132 Input A 2nd Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input A of the 2nd Logic Gate.

... 200 Input F 10th Gate 1 Bit C WTU This is Input F of the 10th Logic Gate. 201 Output 10. Gate 1 Bit C T This is Output of the 10th Logic Gate.

Page 75: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

April 2002

01 07 Event-Schedule-Logic 801701

Siemens AG 801701, 6 pages Technical Handbook Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Postfach 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.11.1.10.1/3

Parameter Restart Behavior

Parameter Einstellungen Restart delay No delay

2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 30 Seconds 1 Minute 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes

The controller is functional after the restart delay time has elapsed.

Delay between two tele-gram transmissions

No delay 0.2 Seconds 0.5 Seconds 1 Second 2 Seconds

This parameter provides for the distribution of bus communi-cation load at restart. This is achieved by distributing request telegrams.

Behavior on bus voltage restoration After an initialization time of approximately 2 seconds and a configurable startup delay on restart the N 350 is operational again. On restart all event trigger inputs are set to 0. The cont-roller fetches the current values from the bus. If an event trigger input is set to 1 during restart and the event trig-ger is set to „change from 0 to 1“ or „reception of 1“ then the event program is triggered and executed. On restart all logic gate inputs are set to 0. The controller fetches the current input values from the bus. The logic gate sends the result of the logic function to the bus. On restart the device gets the time from a master clock. Until the synchronized time is available all schedule functions are blocked.

Parameter Time

Parameter Einstellungen The 1st Schedule

2nd Schedule 3rd Schedule . . 99th Schedule 100th Schedule

This parameter determines the schedule number. named (comment) Enter a comment for documentation purposes here. is inactive

active Activate / deactivate a single schedule here. and is executed on

Monday Tuesday Monday and Tuesday

and on Wednesday Thursday Friday Wednesday and Thursday Wednesday and Friday Thursday and Friday Wednesday, Thursday and Friday

and on Saturday Sunday Saturday and Sunday

These parameters determine on which days a schedule is active.

Page 76: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

April 2002

01 07 Event-Schedule-Logic 801701

Technical Manual 801701, 6 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice Postfach 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.11.1.10.1/4

at (hour) 0 – 23

Default 0 (minute) 0 – 59

Default 0 These parameters determine the time of execution of a schedule.. and controls 1st Schedule Object

2nd Schedule Object 3rd Schedule Object 4th Schedule Object 5th Schedule Object 6th Schedule Object 7th Schedule Object 8th Schedule Object 9th Schedule Object 10th Schedule Object 11th Schedule Object 12th Schedule Object 13th Schedule Object 14th Schedule Object 15th Schedule Object 16th Schedule Object 17th Schedule Object 18th Schedule Object 19th Schedule Object 20th Schedule Object

The controller offers 20 Schedule Objects or Schedule Channels. Via this parameter a schedule can be assigned to any of these Schedule Objects. with the action On

Off This parameter determines the schedule action as on or off.

Parameter Event

Parameter Einstellungen The 1st Event Program

2nd Event Program 3rd Event Program 4th Event Program 5th Event Program 6th Event Program 7th Event Program 8th Event Program 9th Event Program 10th Event Program

The Event Program number is selected here. executes when receiving 0 or 1

when receiving 1 when receiving 0 when changing from 0 to 1 when changing from 1 to 0

This parameter determines what triggers the Event Program. i.e. in the event of (comment)

Enter a comment for documentation purposes here. the event action 1-1

1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10

Each event program may consist of up to 10 event actions. The event action for the current event program is selected here. named (comment). Enter a comment for documentation purposes here. This event action is inactive

active Activate or deactivate the event action with this parameter. and controls with a delay of t * [1s]

0 – 6500 default 0

A delay of the event action is determined by this parameter. If a running event program is triggered again the current execution is halted and the event program started over a-gain. the associated event ob-ject with the action

On Off

This parameter determines the event action as on or off.

Page 77: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

April 2002

01 07 Event-Schedule-Logic 801701

Siemens AG 801701, 6 pages Technical Handbook Automation and Drives Group Electrical Installation Technology Siemens AG 2001 Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Postfach 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg Subject to change without prior notice 3.11.1.10.1/5

Parameter Logic

Parameter Einstellungen Gate 1st Gate

2nd Gate 3rd Gate 4th Gate 5th Gate 6th Gate 7th Gate 8th Gate 9th Gate 10th Gate

One of the ten logic gates is selected here. Gate type: AND

OR NAND NOR

The gate type is selected here. Input A Not connected

direct inverted

Input B Not connected direct inverted

Input C Not connected direct inverted

Input D Not connected direct inverted

Input E Not connected direct inverted

Input F Not connected direct inverted

These parameters determine if and how a logic gate input is used for the logic. ‚Not connected‘: This input is not used by the logic gate. ‚direct‘: The value of this input is used for the logic gate. A ‚1‘ telegram is interpreted as a logic ‚1‘, a ‚0‘ telegram as a logic ‚0‘ input to the gate logic. ‚inverted‘:The value of this input is used for the logic gate. The input value is inverted for the logic gate. A ‚1‘ telegram is interpreted as a logic ‚0‘, a ‚0‘ telegram as a logic ‚1‘ input to the gate logic. Send filter None

only when 1at the output only when 0at the output

This parameter determines which output values are sent onto the bus. „None“ means that both output values 0 and 1 are sent. only when 0at the output „Only when 1at the output“ means that only the output value ‚1‘ of the logic gate output is sent. „Only when 0at the output“ means that only the output value ‚0‘ of the logic gate output is sent. Send condition Only on change of output

when receiving This parameter determines under which condition the result of the logic gate is sent. ‚Only on change of output‘: The output value is only sent when the value of the output changes either from ‚1‘ to ‚0‘ or from ‚0‘ to ‚1‘ AND the send filter above allows the transmis-sion. ‚when receiving‘: The output value is sent when any input receives a new telegram AND the send filter above aloows the transmission.

Eing A INV

Eing F

Eing B

Send

bedi

ngun

g

Send

befil

ter

Ausgang

INV

INV

Ver

knüp

fung

Page 78: EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ...domotica.dis.ulpgc.es/DyCE/Practica5y6_apb.pdf · EDIFICIOS INTELIGENTES Y MULTIMEDIA: DOMOTICA Y CABLEADO ESTRUCTURADO

instabus EIB

Application program descriptions

April 2002

01 07 Event-Schedule-Logic 801701

Technical Manual 801701, 6 pages Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group Update: http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik Siemens AG 2001 Electrical Installation Technology Subject to change without prior notice Postfach 10 09 53, D-93009 Regensburg 3.11.1.10.1/6

Room for Notes


Recommended